JP2019080757A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game and special variation winning devices 38, 39 capable of changing a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. A special result includes a first special result with operation of a condition device and a second special result without operation of the condition device. Further, the control means can change the special variation winning device to be in the open state according to a predetermined open time every plural rounds in the game state advantageous to a player corresponding to the first special result. In a specific round in the game state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, the open time in the round after the specific round can be notified. The open time in the round after the specific round in the game state advantageous to the player corresponding to the second special result is the same open time in the game state advantageous to the player corresponding to the second special result.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 114

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (symbols, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the game ball winning in the start opening provided in the game area (start prize). When the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened is performed. Also, it has been proposed that the opening mode of the special variation winning device in the special gaming state is provided in a plurality of types according to the special result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-104204, A

  However, the interest in the special game state can not be sufficiently improved only by changing the release mode of the special variation winning device according to the special result. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
Control means for controlling the game;
And a special variation winning device capable of converting the closed state where the game ball can not be won to the open state where the game ball can be reached.
The special results include a first special result with the operation of the condition device and a second special result without the operation of the condition device,
The control means
The special fluctuation winning device can be converted to the open state according to a predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result.
In a specific round in a gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, an open time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in a round after the specific round can be notified,
The opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in the round after the specific round in the game state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result is the game corresponding to the second special result It is characterized in that the opening time is the same as the opening time according to the opening state of the special variation winning device in the gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

  According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a 1st special change winning a prize device. It is a figure explaining the composition of a collective display. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining transition of a game state. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining discharge ball monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number. It is a figure explaining the example in which the special figure 2 abnormal change information is performed. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure starting opening 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining special processing 1 special processing. It is a flow chart explaining special processing 2 special processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining high probability change frequency number update processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing of the special figure 1 during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing of special figure 2 during fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining the special figure 1 during change processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 during change processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 2 during a special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process under special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process under special figure 2 display. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special processing 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special processing 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special winning opening open. FIG. 20 is a flowchart for describing a process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening open process. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flowchart explaining small hit fanfare middle processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hitting end processing. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining starting opening 1 signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability change operation area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a lever solenoid control process. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining single-shot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining big hit system command processing. (A) A flowchart explaining count production setting processing, (b) It is a figure explaining a notice time table. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting | reporting of openable time. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting | reporting of openable time. It is a figure explaining another example of alerting | reporting of openable time. It is a figure explaining an example of the suggestion of the degree of expectation in reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of the suggestion of the degree of expectation in reach production. It is a figure explaining transition of the game state in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining another example of transition of the game state in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of pre-reading effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state in the 3rd modification.

First Embodiment
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are disposed, and on the lower right side of the center case 40, one general winning opening 35 is disposed. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 11).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first start winning opening 36 (a start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view 1 variation display game. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 11). Further, at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second start winning opening 37 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view 2 variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 11).

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right of the first start winning opening 36, a first special convertible into a state in which the game ball is not accepted or a state in which it is easily accepted by the result of the special view variation display game. A fluctuation winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is disposed.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the upper big winning opening (convenient closing state for the player) is converted to open state (advantage state for the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 has, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by the opening and closing door 38c driven by the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 11) as a driving device, During the special game state based on the above, it is made easy to flow the game ball into the large winning opening by converting the upper large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, and the player can obtain a predetermined gaming value (prize ball ) Is given. Inside the upper winning opening (winning area), the upper winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 11) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper winning opening There is.

  The flow path of the gaming ball in the first special variation winning device 38 is shown in FIG. Inside the first special variation winning device 38 (winning area), a super large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the first special variation winning device 38 ing. The game balls that have entered the first special variation winning device 38 are all detected through the upper large winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper channel 38j.

  The upper channel 38j is provided with a probability changing operation area 38h into which game balls can flow, and the lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 11) to change the inflow probability of the game balls to the probability changing operation area 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. The lever member is a plate-like member which can slide in the front and rear direction, and projects forward as shown in FIG. 3 to cover the positive change operation area 38h and retracts backward when the game ball can not flow into the positive change operation area 38h Then, it can be converted into the open state in which the game ball can flow into the positive change operation area 38h. That is, the probability change operation area 38h can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball can not win a prize and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize, and forms a specific area into which the game ball can flow. However, the inflow restricting member can be converted into a state in which the gaming ball can not flow into the specific area (probable change operation area 38h) and a state in which the gaming ball can flow.

  The probability changing operation area switch 38d is provided in the probability changing operation area 38h and can detect the inflow of gaming balls, and the gaming ball having flowed into the probability changing operation area 38h is detected by the probability changing operation area switch 38d, and then the lower flow path 38k Flow into Based on the detection of the game ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d, the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is made to be the high probability state after the end of the special game state.

  In addition, a passage opening switch 38g capable of detecting passage of gaming balls is provided on the lower stream side on the left side of the probability variation actuation area 38h in the upper flow passage 38j, and the gaming spheres that did not flow into the probability variation actuation area 38h are After being detected by the passage port switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow passage 38k. In the lower flow path 38k, a flow path in which gaming balls having passed through the probability change operation area 38h flow down and a flow path in which gaming balls having passed through the passage port switch 38g flow are joined on the downstream side. The discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting passage of gaming balls is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow passage 38k, and all the game balls flowing into the lower flow passage 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e After that, it flows into the discharge passage which discharges the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In the first special variation winning device 38 configured in this way, the number of gaming balls detected by the upper large winning opening switch 38a matches the number of gaming balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g. By doing this, it can be confirmed that all the gaming balls having flowed into the upper flow passage 38j have been discharged. Furthermore, when the number of gaming balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of gaming balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the gaming balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are all It can confirm that it was discharged. In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the first special variation winning device 38 by matching the number of in-flowing game balls detected by the upper large winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. It can be confirmed that all was discharged.

  Returning to FIG. 2, immediately below the first start winning opening 36, a second special variation winning device (lower large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted. 39 are provided. The second special variation winning device 39 is provided with an open / close door 39c which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type open / close door 39c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and the result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the lower large winning opening (unfavorably closed state for the player) is converted to open state (state advantageous for the player). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 11) as a drive device. During the special gaming state based on the above, it is possible to facilitate the flow of gaming balls into the lower large winning opening by converting the lower large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, and the player can obtain a predetermined gaming value (prize ball ) Is given.

  A lower large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 11) is disposed inside (lower winning area) of the lower large winning opening as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the large winning opening. . Further, below the second special variation winning device 39, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

  The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, the second special fluctuation winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper or lower side of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 in FIG. In this case, the upper and lower portions may be completely overlapped, or only a part may be vertically overlapped with the left and right offset. In addition, the opening and closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attachment type, and other types such as a slide type capable of opening the big winning opening by sliding a plate-like member capable of closing the big winning opening. It may be in the form of

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike), so that the player can aim for winning on the first start winning opening 36, and shoots the game ball to the right side game area. By performing (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 and the first special variation winning device 38. It should be noted that the second special variation winning device 39 can aim at firing the game ball to either the left or the right game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and is discharged to the right gaming area. The gaming ball thus formed is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, at the lower right of the game board 30), a special figure 1 variation display game for making a special figure variation display game or a batch of special information 2 variation display games and various information is displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The special view 1 display for the special view 1 change display game (first special view change display unit) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display for the special view 2 change display game (second special view change display part) 52 (D2), start figure number notification of the special view 1 change display game composed of the LED lamp Storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14).

  In addition, the round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing of the first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38 or the second special fluctuation winning apparatus 39) on the collective display device 50; The first gaming state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) which informs the player of the striking manner (a striking manner corresponding to the gaming state) in the normal hitting) and the right hitting, and the probability state (high of special view fluctuation display game) A probability display unit 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying of the probability state or the low probability state) is provided. In the collective display unit 50, a probability state display unit displays that the probability state of big hit is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when big hit occurs and reports occurrence of big hit A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Furthermore, the ordinary forming the second starting winning opening where the game ball can be won based on the common drawing variation display game being executed like the conventional gaming machine and the common drawing variation display game becoming the specified result When the variable winning device is provided, a common drawing display unit for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game, a storage display unit for starting memory number notification of the common drawing fluctuation display game, and a time saving state occurrence when the time saving state occurs A time shorting notification unit or the like may be provided to notify the user.

  The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special view 1 fluctuation display game in the special view 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, in addition to the center segment, it is provided on the lower side of 7 segments rightward The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing, so that it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "detachment", for example, the central segment (in addition to the special segment 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the declination, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed with the result mode (e.g., numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the offset being on as the hit result mode (special result mode).

  The memory display unit 54 sets the number of undivided balls (number of starting memories = number of holdings) out of the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the special view 1 display 51 as shown in FIG. As shown in), it is displayed by turning off and lighting (flickering) a plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 60 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 4D, when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, selected according to the special result. Turn on the LED corresponding to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (e), the first gaming state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the game state in which the left strike is more advantageous to the player than the right strike (normal strike). If the player is in a game state in which the right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike (right strike), all the LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 4E, the probability display unit 78 turns all LEDs off when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability state) In the case of state), all the LEDs are turned on.

  FIG. 5 shows the probability of the big hit and the small hit, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. Note that the jackpot is a special result (first special result) involving the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view fluctuation display game (big hit symbol stop display), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the first as a special motorized role It means that a specific flag for successively operating the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the second special fluctuation winning device 39 is set (the bonus continuous operating device is activated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

  The big hit probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probability in the normal gaming state which is the low probability state and the specific gaming state which is the high probability state is shown in FIG. The probability is as shown in 5 (a). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (the first special gaming state), the gaming ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the probability changing operation area switch 38d By (V passing), it is configured to be in a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and to be in a low probability state when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times). In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of being a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 5 (b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the jackpot and jackpot lottery, the jackpot and the jackpot are not won in duplicate. Therefore, in the high probability state, the special figure 2 is always elected to either the big hit or the small hit. In addition, it may be made to become an out result.

  Also, FIG. 5 (c) shows jackpot types and distribution probabilities that can be selected in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and FIG. 5 (d) shows small jack types that can be selected in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. And, the special fluctuation winning equipment which is released in each small hit type, the opening time and the number of times of opening and the distribution probability are shown. As shown in FIG. 5C, there are three types of special results in the special figure 1 variable display game, 12R positive variation, 5R positive variation, and 12R normal, and the special result in the special figure 2 variable display game is There are two types, 12R positive variation and 2R positive variation. These special result types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each jackpot type indicates the number of rounds, and the term "probability" means that the game ball is likely to flow into the probability change operating area 38h and is likely to be in a high probability state (probable state) after the end of the special game state, normally It has been shown that there is a low possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h, and it is difficult to be in the high probability state (probability state) after the end of the special game state. It is to be noted that a special result may be provided in which the probability that the gaming ball is less likely to flow into the probability variation actuation area 38h than the probability variation is high, but the game sphere is likely to flow into the probability variation actuation region 38h than the normal probability.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball flows into the probability variation actuation region 38h, so the probability variation actuation region 38h even if the jackpot type is definite variation If the game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and if the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h even if the type of the big hit is normal, the state becomes the high probability state. In addition, with regard to the 2R probability change of the special figure 2, there is not a lot of balls but there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h It is set to 100 times. In the special gaming state based on the 2R probability variation, an effect is provided such that the number of executable games can be added in the high probability state. Also, in the special game state based on small hits (second special game state), the probability state is not changed due to the presence or absence of inflow into the probability change operation area 38h, and the probability state at the time of occurrence of a small hit will be maintained .

  FIG. 6 shows the open mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the release mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6 (a), in the 12R positive variation, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and the upper V is released. The upper V open is an open mode in which the gaming ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation area 38 h. Then, after the second round, the lower short circuit opening is performed to open the second special variation winning device 39. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the 5R positive variation similarly opens the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round, and opens the second special variation winning device 39 in the second and subsequent rounds. Do a short open. Also, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), the 2R positive variation similarly opens the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round, and releases the second special variation winning device 39 in the second round. Do the lower short open.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, in the 12R normal mode, the first short circuit is performed to open the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round. The upper short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38 h is lower than the upper V opening. Then, after the second round, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened for the lower long. Note that it is only the upper V open and the upper short open which are performed in the first round that gaming balls can be made to flow into the positive change operation area 38 h. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the gaming balls may flow into the probability change operation area 38h forming the specific area, is the first round.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), in the lower long opening, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t11), or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) of 25000 ms openable time elapses. When one of the conditions for winning of the game ball is satisfied, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed to complete the round (t12). Thereafter, the lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is started (t12), and when the lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is ended, an interval time is started (t13), and when the interval time is ended, the next round is started (t14) ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, in the upper V opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probability changing operation area 38h and the gaming ball can not flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retracts from the probability changing operation area 38h. The gaming ball is ready to flow. Further, the state in which the probability changing operation area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability change operation area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d is treated as being invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 ms have elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 opens may flow into the probability variation operation area 38h.

  When 200 ms have passed since the start of the round, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the first special variation winning device 38 is released again (t35), and the condition that the 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins When it is established, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t39). Thereafter, the interval time and upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time are started (t39), and the upper round winning opening residual ball processing time is ended, the interval time is started (t41), and the interval time is ended, the next round is started (T42).

  In addition, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variation winning device 38, the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). In addition, the probability change operation area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is an opening for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so the gaming ball flows into the positive changing operation area 38h almost certainly It will be. Therefore, when the jackpot type is positive, the probability state is almost certainly high.

  Also, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time after the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special fluctuation winning device 38 just before closing. The game ball can also flow into the probability change operation area 38h. It should be noted that the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is a large winning opening remaining ball processing When all the balls are discharged, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42) to end the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

  In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when the predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and all the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time If the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the completion of the discharge and the operation is ended. The positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

  In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of gaming balls are winning, and the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 has a large winning opening remaining ball processing time In the case where all of the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43) When the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the operation is ended. In this case, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43), the positive change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44).

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the upper short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning apparatus 38 in the upper V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is ended based on the end. End the round (t54). Since the opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is an opening for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also a short time, the possibility of the game ball flowing into the positive changing operation area 38h is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, the probability state is high.

  The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation operation area switch perform the same operation as in the case of the upper V open as long as the gaming ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 (t55 ~ T63). Therefore, even if the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even after the large winning a prize opening game processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. And end the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated. If all gaming balls are not ejected by the end (t62) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off in the end (t62) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state. After the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), when 100 ms elapses, the positive change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

  Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 7 (b) and the first special variation winning device in the upper short opening shown in FIG. 7 (c) The opening 38 (t51 to t54) is an opening time such that at least one game ball can be awarded to the first special variation winning device 38.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (d), in the lower short opening, the second special variable winning apparatus 39 is opened with the start of the round (t71), or a predetermined number (for example, nine pieces) of openable time of 1808 ms elapses. When one of the conditions for winning of the game ball is satisfied, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed to complete the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which is a closing condition, occur, and it is often closed as the openable time elapses. Thereafter, the lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is started (t72), and when the lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is ended, an interval time is started (t73), and when the interval time is ended, the next round is started (t74 ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  The lower short opening is substantially the same as the opening of the special variation winning device based on the small hit 2. This makes it possible to give the impression that small hits occur frequently. Note that although the openable time based on the small hit is 1792 ms and the openable time at the short open of the big hit is 1808 ms, the difference between them is 16 ms, and the player determines the difference in the openable time. Is a difficult one. Although the difference between the openable times may be more than this, it is preferable that the difference be difficult for the player to distinguish between the two. Of course, the openable time of both may be the same.

  FIG. 8 shows the transition of the gaming state. The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, there is a special gaming state, but it is omitted here. In each gaming state, a winning probability that a special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, a presentation mode that is controlled by the presentation control device 300 to determine the presentation mode of the game, and should be aimed mainly at the gaming state A main starting area which is a starting area, a main variation special figure which is a type of special figure variation display game to be executed mainly, and a firing direction of the game ball are defined.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for winning in the first start winning opening 36 by left hitting, and to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 by right hitting. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be executed according to the player's intention. Moreover, in each gaming state, it is designed on the assumption that the game is mainly advanced among one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player plays the game according to this design. In order to advance, it is configured that it is advantageous for the player to advance the game mainly on one of the special view variation display games determined to be the main design. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

  In the normal gaming state ST1, the hit probability is a low probability state, and the state is not a time saving state (no time saving) in which the variation time of the special view variation display game is shortened. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the normal mode. Further, since the main variation special view is a special view 1 variation display game, the main start area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first start winning opening 36. That is, it is designed such that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. As described later, in the normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special view 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special view 2 variation display game becomes temporally inefficient, and the player is made not to select the execution of the special view 2 variation display game aiming to obtain a small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. .

  The first specific gaming state ST2 is a high probability state of hitting probability, and is a short time state in which the variation time of the special view variation display game is shortened (with time reduction). The presentation mode defining the presentation mode is a small hit RUSH mode. Further, since the main variation special view is a special view 2 variation display game, the main start area is the second start winning opening 37, and in order to aim at the second start winning opening 37, the shooting direction is right-handed. That is, it is designed such that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this first specific gaming state ST2, the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game is shorter than that of the normal gaming state ST1, and the right start is performed to aim at the second start winning opening 37, and the special view 2 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. There are only big hit and small hit in the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the probability that the small hit is won is higher than the big hit, so the small hit occurs frequently in this first specific game state ST2 As a result, the player's ball increases. Thus, since the small hit occurs frequently, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

  The second specific gaming state ST3 is a high probability state of hit probability, and is a state (not time reduction) which is not a time saving state in which the variation time of the special view variation display game is shortened. The rendering mode that defines the rendering mode is the high mode. Further, since the main variation special view is a special view 1 variation display game, the main start area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first start winning opening 36. That is, it is designed such that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. The execution mode such as the fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game is the same as that of the normal gaming state ST1, except that the probability state is the high probability state.

  In addition, since the normal mode, the small hit RUSH mode, and the High mode which are the effect modes in each gaming state described above are different presentation modes, it is possible to grasp which gaming state the player is. Further, in addition to making it possible to grasp the gaming state by the effect mode, the firing direction of the game ball is notified, and the player can grasp the firing direction and the main variation special view. In particular, in the high mode, a probability change notification display capable of clearly grasping that the player is in the high probability state may be performed to prevent the player from stopping the game.

  Of the three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Since the second specific gaming state ST3 is a high probability state, it is a state advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1, and the first specific gaming state ST2 is a high probability state and a short time state so that the normal gaming state ST1 or the second 2) It is a more advantageous state for the player than the specific gaming state ST3.

  The transition of the gaming state is performed by the termination of the special gaming state based on the derivation of the special result or the completion of the prescribed number of games. Basically, a special result is derived and it becomes a special game state, and a game ball flows into the definite change operation area 38h of the first special change winning device 38 in the special game state and is detected by the positive change operation area switch 38d (V passing) transitions to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the special gaming state. Further, when a special result is derived and becomes a special gaming state, and the gaming ball does not flow into the probability change operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the special gaming state (no V passage), the special gaming state After the end of the game, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered. Further, in the high probability state such as the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3, transition to the normal gaming state ST1 when the specified game number (100 times here) is executed after the end of the special gaming state Do.

  As an exception to the transition of the gaming state, in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, a special result is derived in the special view 2 variable display game which is not the main variation special view, and becomes the special gaming state, and in the special gaming state There is a case where a gaming ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the probability changing operation area switch 38d (with V passage). In this case, after the end of the special game state, it shifts to the second specified game state ST3 instead of the first specified game state ST2. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, the game value given to the player is made different depending on whether or not the special figure variation display game is the main special figure variation display game. It will be. Here, the game value of whether or not the special view 2 variable display game is in the short time state is different.

  Here, with regard to the special figure 2 variation display game, the game value given to the player is made different depending on whether or not the special figure variation display game is the main special figure variation display game. Similarly, with regard to the variable display game, the game value provided to the player may be made different depending on whether or not the special map variable display game is the main special game variable display game. In addition, although the game value to be made different is the presence or absence of the time saving state, it is not limited to this. For example, the number of rounds in the special gaming state or the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 may be made different. In addition, the ease of inflow of gaming balls into the probability variation operation area 38h may be made different. Also, the number of games to be in the time saving state may be made different. In addition to this, whether or not to execute a specific video, audio or the like may be differentiated as a game value in effect. Furthermore, these combinations may be used.

  In addition, in the special gaming state, an effect may be performed to notify which of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state to shift to after the end of the special gaming state. By performing such an effect, it is possible to notify in advance the shooting direction of the game ball after the end of the special game state. The execution timing of the effect may be any timing during the special game state, for example, during a specific round or ending.

  In addition, as the effect, the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are shown as candidates for the transition of the gaming state, and an effect of selecting one of them by roulette etc. may be performed. In this way, by setting the effect to seem as if the gaming state transitioning by lottery is set, the transition to the disadvantageous gaming state is achieved by the special result derived in the special figure variation display game which is not the main variation special figure Can reduce the sense of discomfort or discouragement. In particular, for a player who does not know that the gaming state to be changed is different depending on whether or not it is the main variation special view, the gaming ball has flowed into the probability changing operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the special gaming state. However, it has a sense of discomfort or discouragement because it shifts to a more disadvantageous gaming state than expected. However, it is possible to think that the game state has shifted to a disadvantageous gaming state by falling into the lottery by executing an effect such as performing a lottery, and it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort or discouragement.

  In addition, within a predetermined period immediately after the main fluctuation special figure is switched or within the predetermined number of games, even if the launch direction is switched, the game ball that has already been fired wins the intention winning opening that is not the main starting area It is possible that a special figure variation display game which is not a main variation special figure is executed and it becomes a special result in the special figure variation display game, but a special figure variation display game which is not intended as such and is not a main variation special figure It is considered that the player does not recognize that the special result is derived in the special figure variation display game which is not the main variation special figure when the special result is derived in It is particularly effective to carry out such an effect.

  9 and 10 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is off in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3. As described above, in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3, the main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, and the player mainly proceeds to play the special figure 1 variation display game, As for the special figure 2, even when any variation pattern is selected, a long variation is selected in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set. Although the time of the long fluctuation is about 10 minutes, it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  That is, in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game is longer than the fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation display game It has become. Although the probability of a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 2 variable display game, the normal game state ST1 and the normal game state ST1 In the second specific game state ST3, execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is timely inefficient, and in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 1 variable display game is given to the player. It is mainly made to advance the game. Then, as described above, the special view 1 change display game is made not to shift to the first specific play state ST2 even if it becomes a big hit in the special view 2 change display game in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It makes it more disadvantageous than the above, and allows the player to mainly advance the special view 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is lost in the first specific gaming state ST2. It should be noted that no variation pattern is set because there is no case in which the result of the lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game is not released. In addition, only one variation pattern is selected for the special figure 1 variation display game. In the first specific gaming state ST2, contrary to the case of the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3 described above, the special view 2 variation display game is the main variation, and the special view 1 variation display game is the irregular variation. It is designed to be.

  Here, in the special view 1 variation display game in which irregular variation occurs in the first specific gaming state ST2, the variation time in the case of deviation results in the special game variation ST1 or the second specific gaming condition ST3 becomes irregular variation in particular. In the variable display game shown in FIG. 2, it is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time (see FIG. 9A) when the result of the shift is obtained. As described later, a short time is set as a fluctuation time when the special view 2 variation display game is a big hit or a small hit in the first specific gaming state ST2 as described later, and further, the special figure in the first specific gaming state ST2 This is because there is no case in which the result of the lottery for the 2 variable display game is not released.

  That is, in the first specific gaming state ST2 in which the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is short and can be executed efficiently in time, the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of losing as the result of the lottery is clearer It is disadvantageous, and it is possible to make the player advance the special view 2 variation display game mainly without setting the variation time for a long time. Therefore, it is not necessary to set a fluctuation time longer than necessary as the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation display game, but the special view 2 fluctuation display game is mainly used when it is executed simultaneously with the special view 2 fluctuation display game. In order for the game to proceed, it is made to be forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as a sufficiently long fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

  FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is a big hit in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3. As for the special figure 2, it is possible to select only the fluctuation pattern which does not generate the reach state. It should be noted that in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, the variation time when the special view 2 variation display game is a big hit is better than the selectable variation time when the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit It may be a long fluctuation time. Further, as described above, even if the result is a big hit in the special view 2 change display game in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, the second specific gaming state ST3 is achieved even if the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h In the case where a big hit occurs due to the irregular fluctuation, the player is prevented from becoming excessively advantageous, and the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation is promoted.

  FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is a big hit in the first specific gaming state ST2. None of them generates a reach state, and a very short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is selected. In particular, for the special view 1 change display game, the second shortest change time is selected when compared including the change time selectable in the case of a big hit or a small hit in the special view 2 change display game. ing. This increases the possibility that the special view 1 variation display game which is irregular variation even in the first specific gaming state ST2 is stopped earlier than the special view 2 variation display game which is the main variation, and the special figure 1 variation display The game's jackpot is forced to be less likely to be turned into an out result. In addition, although distribution of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is performed by the above-mentioned big hit kind, you may make it determine by a random number etc.

  FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3. As for the special figure 2, the reach condition is not generated, and the long variation in which the variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 10D shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is a small hit in the first specific gaming state ST2. None of them generates a reach state, and a very short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is selected. In addition, about the special figure 1 fluctuation indication game, it makes same time as the case of the departure in the 1st specific game state ST2, but also with the big hit or the small hitting of the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game same as the case of the omission It is time enough to be stopped. About fluctuation time when special figure 1 fluctuation indication game becomes disappointment or small hitting in 1st specific game state ST2, time which is sufficient to be forced to be stopped by big hit or small hitting of special figure 2 fluctuation indication game If it is, it may be shorter than the time shown here.

  From the above, in the special result, the first special result (big hit) which can generate the first special game state, and the second special game in which the game value which can be given to the player is lower than the first special game state The second special result (small hit) that can generate the condition is included.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to play a game in line with the design of the gaming machine. That is, when an action is intentionally made to aim at a special figure 2 variation display game in which the probability of occurrence of a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 variation display game in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3 The benefits which can be given to the player assumed in the above will be greatly exceeded. However, by setting the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game, or by setting the gaming state to be shifted when the special view 2 variation display game is not the main variation special view and becomes a big hit as described above, the special view 2) It is possible to prevent an act of intentionally aiming when the variation display game is not a main variation special figure. In addition, by making it possible to vary the game value to be granted depending on whether or not it is a main fluctuation special figure in this way, the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine such as the jackpot probability, the type, and the number of time-savings increases. It is possible to develop more various game machines.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished, they are referred to simply as a special view change display game. When the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure fluctuation display game. Also, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning hole 35 and the first start winning hole 36, the second start winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and discharged from the gaming area 32 Be done. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, A corresponding number of winning balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 11) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as starting winning balls for the special view 1 variation display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided internally, and the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as the first starting memory. ) Are stored to the limit. When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 in a state where the special view 1 variation display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory along with the generation of the start right Is stored, and the first start memory number is incremented by one, and the special view 1 variable display game is started immediately based on the first start memory, at which time the first start memory number is decremented by one. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game can not be started immediately, for example, the special figure 1 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variation display game has not ended, or the special gaming state is set. If the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, the first start memory number is incremented by one and the first start memory is stored if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number. . Then, in a state where the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started (when the previous special figure 1 fluctuation display game is ended or the special gaming state is ended), the first While the number of starting memories is decremented by one, the special view 1 variation display game is started based on the stored first starting memories.

  The winning balls to the second starting winning opening 37 are detected as starting winning balls for the special view 2 variation display game by the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. When there is a winning on the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special view 2 variable display game can be started, the special view 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game can not be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game is already performed and the special figure 2 variable display game is not finished, or when it is in the special game state Even if the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory does not occur. In addition, when there is a prize to the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 37 in the state which can start the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game, 2nd starting memory occurs once for convenience of processing, but the said 2nd starting memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the 2nd starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not occur.

  In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random value is within the gaming control device 100 (see FIG. 11). The special map storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special map start storage up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times for the first start storage). Then, the storage number of the special view start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 54 (special view 1 suspension display) for the start winning number notification of the collective display unit 50 and also in the display unit 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration special view start memory display.

  The game control apparatus 100 performs the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the winning or the first start storage on the first start winning opening 36, and the second start Based on the winning on the winning opening 37, the special view 2 change display game is performed on the special view 2 display 52 (second change display device). The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit) When it becomes, the one special figure fluctuation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (a result of losing).

  In the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, after the variation display is performed in the display mode as shown in FIG. 4B, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result aspect (big hit result aspect) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes big hit, and it becomes 1st special game state (so-called big hit state). Also, when the result of the special view variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode in which the display mode of the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode) It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special view 1 display 51 forms a first change display means capable of displaying a first change display game (special view 1 change display game) based on the winning of the game ball on the first start winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 forms the 2nd fluctuation indicatory expedient which can indicate the 2nd fluctuation indicatory game (special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game) which is based on the winning of the game sphere to the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 37.

  In addition, in response to execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device (image display device) 41 fluctuates and displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) A special figure variation display game to be performed is to be executed. The decoration special figure variation display game includes an decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and an decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, which are separately Displayed in the display area of Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special view variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special view variation display game.

  That is, an ornament variation display game (variation display of ornament identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) The decoration variation display means can be displayed to display the decoration special figure variation display game). Note that separate display devices may be used in the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit, small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, One of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Then, interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b receive signals of negative logic such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches and convert them into 0V-5V positive logic signals. Is provided. In the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, when the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is incorrectly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. It is possible to detect an abnormal state as if it were floating and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The proximity I / F 121a, 121b, the gate switch 34a in the common view start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the top special winning opening switch 38a in the first special variation winning device 38, the second special Lower prize winning opening switch 39a of the variable winning device 39, probability changing operation area switch 38d provided in the probability changing operation region 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, second The start opening 2 switch 37a in the start winning opening 37, the passage opening switch 38g for detecting gaming balls that did not flow into the probability change operation area 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, the first special variation winning device 38 A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a game ball and a board radio sensor 62 for detecting the emission of a radio wave to the gaming machine are connected.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper large winning opening switch 38a, the lower large winning opening switch 39a, the positive change operation area switch 38d, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening The detection signal of the 2 switch 37 a is input to the second input port 123.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the passage port switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the panel radio sensor 62, and abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Also, a frame radio wave improper signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device 200 can receive a command) A signal indicating whether or not it is in an abnormal state is also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output of the passage port switch 38g of the outputs to the third input port 124 are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70 It is also supplied to the non-illustrated test shot testing device via the same. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It is supposed to be.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch requiring no processing such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I / F 121a, 121b is supplied to the test shot test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variation winning device 38, the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b, and the second special variation winning device 39, the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b and the first. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting operation data of the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the special variation winning device 38. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the lever solenoid 38f output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. 1 driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of a segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the collective display device 50, and an external information terminal board 71 for supplying an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d is provided to output the signal.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

  In addition, although it is not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, the lower large winning opening switch 39a, the positive change operation area switch 38d in the first special variation winning device 38, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passage opening switch 38g have a coil for detecting magnetism, when a metal approaches the coil A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes is used. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312 STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT 0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The voiced sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for rendering) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, the random number value etc. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. A big hit determination random number value or the like of the first start storage is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit deviation or variation pattern of the special view 1 variation display game is performed. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning opening 37, the random number value and the like for the big hit determination of the special view 2 variation display game is extracted Store start memory. A big hit determination random number value or the like of the second start storage is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit out or variation pattern of the special view 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special view 2 variation display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special view 2 variation display game. , Do not reserve the start of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, processing is performed to display a special view variation display game which is stopped and displayed. That is, the game control for performing the progress control of the variable display game based on the winning of the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 37) of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 Make a means.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 when the result of the special view variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also the special game Perform processing to generate a state. In the processing for generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 by the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, and enables the flow of gaming balls into the upper large winning opening. Control to Alternatively, control is performed to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 by the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b, and to allow the flow of gaming balls into the lower large winning opening.

  Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is The release (one round) is performed, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 controls a lever solenoid 38f that operates a lever member 38i that restricts the inflow of the first special variation winning device 38 into the probability change operation area 38h in the special game state. Then, based on the fact that the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h and is detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d (V is passed), a high probability state can be generated after the end of the special game state. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the low probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the opening and closing mode of the special variation winning apparatus (the first special variation winning apparatus 38 and the second special variation winning apparatus 39) and the operation mode control of the inflow regulating member (lever member 38i) Make a means.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 13, a stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the values of registers etc. when an interrupt occurs after performing the processing for inhibiting the interrupt (step X1) first Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order takes 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step X5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps X8 to X12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check it (step X8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on Perform (step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination (step X9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited for. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11). Is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, access to read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13) And) output OFF data to all output ports (set to a state without output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example 5 Ah) (step X17), and normal (Step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), the checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 14 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 14 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  At step X21 in FIG. 14, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.

  Thereafter, a command at the time of the power failure recovery corresponding to the special drawing status prepared to execute the special drawing game processing described later rationally is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step X22), Go to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both under normal processing which will be described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed nor in the special game mode, The command of the waiting demo screen is transmitted, otherwise the command of the recovery screen is transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18 and X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) And transmit a plurality of commands such as a command for causing notification of the RAM initialization. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  At step X28, processing for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step X28, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step X29). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X30), an interrupt is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, initial value random number update processing (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" which is updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are timer interrupt processing units of program processing. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the same cycle CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing). Also, for the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step X32, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and check (step X33) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number update process (step X32), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and in the case where such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step X32 is initial in both. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination (step X34) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step X36). A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step X38), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step X39). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum at power-off of the RWM, and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 15 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56) It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 to repeat the above processing. When the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 16 shows the initial value random number updating process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is ended. Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure variation display game, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display game in the special pattern variation display game It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides small hitting stop design. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. In addition, when the signal of the firing stop is output in step X5 in the main process, the signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process, and the firing permission signal is set to be in the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a, upper large winning opening switch 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of an error A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are open.

  Next, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Then, a special figure 1 game process (step X110) that performs a process related to the special figure 1 change display game and a special figure 2 game process (step X111) that performs a process related to the special figure 2 change display game are performed.

  Next, segment LED editing processing (step X112) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying special information related to the display of special view variation display game and various information to display desired content (step X112), magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), which performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality, and board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, external information editing processing (step X115) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer.

  Next, a probability change operation area switch monitoring process (step X116) is performed. In this probability change operation area switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls in the probability change operation area switch 38d provided in the probability change operation area 38h. Thereafter, lever solenoid control processing (step X117) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the timer interruption processing is ended. Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and switch reading processing (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and input processing is ended.

In the present embodiment, “prepare” means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.
Further, as information on the above-mentioned unused bit data and inverted bit data, information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step X144). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit is 0 in the first and second readings (step X150), and the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 are logically ANDed. It is set as a fixed bit (step X151).

  Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the state is 0 for the same state and 1 for the other bit in the first and second reading (step X152), and the logic between the indeterminate bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently decided bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step X154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step X155), End the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch read changes the signal by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous read. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 11) for outputting the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b are synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step X164), combine the acquired information and the external information data (step X165). Then, the synthesized data is output to the port 136 for digit output and the port 137 for external information output (step X166). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169), and the synthesized data and the output data of emission permission are synthesized (step X170), and the synthesized data is used for external information output Output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shot tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( Step X 175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X176), and the output process is finished.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). The count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, if there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y) in this determination, the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 to repeat the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a counted number (step X181; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining number area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new winning ball remaining number (step X186), and the game is saved in the winning ball remaining number area (step X187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the subtraction result is not saved in the winning ball remaining number area, the value before subtraction is stored in the winning ball remaining number area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X191) Return to step X188.

  As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control can not be immediately started. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information setting whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the status of the payout busy signal, and the idle state in which the payout control can be started immediately, the payout Either a busy state in which control can not be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The undefined state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process when the power is turned on. In this undetermined state, the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time in a state indicating that the payout control can or can not be started immediately. Eliminate it with That is, even if a status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is output from the dispensing control device 200 when a power failure occurs and returns from the power outage, the winning ball command is immediately issued to the dispensing control device 200. In response to the status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the dispensing control device 200 without transmitting, a winning ball command is transmitted to the dispensing control device 200. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. Here, also in the case of an undefined state, it is determined that it is busy. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196). It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 to repeat the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198) A payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms, for example, is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to any reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variation winning device 38 provided in the gaming area 32) , Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variation prize device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means A payout control means (dispense control device 200) for performing a payout control of balls, and the game control means is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. A status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means when control is performed to send a winning ball command to the payout control means based on (busy signal) and a power failure occurs and returns from the blackout. Is output Even in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without continuously transmitting the winning ball command to the payout control means, the state signal is continuously output for a predetermined period. The winning ball command is to be sent to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (a first start winning port 36, a second start winning port 37, a general winning port 35, a first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) can specify the presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball command instructing the payout control of the game ball for each number of prize balls, a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) , And the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200). It is made to transmit, and the identification of whether the status signal indicates that the payout control means can start the payout control is preceded by the identification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball instruction in each winning ball instruction counter. It will be done.

  In addition, while overall game control is performed, the predetermined winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to) and payout control for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means And means (the payout control device 200), wherein the game control means is capable of starting the payout control in which the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control Means for transmitting the winning ball command to the payout control means (game control apparatus 100), and the number of winning balls for which the payout is determined in accordance with the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area Prize ball including information about Information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the game number (main award ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means comprising a payout control means for outputting the status signal outputted from the payout control means The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (a first start winning opening 36, a second start winning opening 37, a general winning opening 35). , A prize ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command of the present invention is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. Can be memorized The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball at a predetermined winning area at the time of winning, and updating the game ball in response to transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and is updated when the gaming ball is prized in the predetermined prize area, By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 22 shows the random number updating process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial step of the loaded small hit symbol random number The value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 23 shows the random number updating process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred based on the calculated address (step X233). At this time, in the table to be referred to, an upper limit judgment value, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made one round is stored for each type of random number.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is loaded (step X234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). Then, when the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value as the added value (hereinafter referred to as The mask update value is obtained by adding “1” to the masked value), and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process goes to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), Go to step X239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is judged whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240) Proceed to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), set “0” as the high-order 1 byte of the random value, and the low-order 1 byte of the random value, the value of the random number area to update (1 byte ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step X233 (step X243). Then, if the new random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; N), the new random number is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is regarded as a new random number again (step X244). The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step X247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A is a variation pattern (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of gaming balls into the starting area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Function as random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 24 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). Even though the winning opening is not open, the fraud & winnings monitoring process (step X302) is performed to monitor whether the winning opening has an incorrect winning and to detect a normal winning.

  In the winning opening monitoring table (corruption monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data to determine whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of the fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the wrong number area, a wrong prize error The notification command, the upper limit value of the number of incorrect winnings (the number of incorrect determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of repetition of monitoring (number of switches), monitoring switch bit, address of winning number counter area 1, address of winning number counter area 2 is defined. The fraud monitoring table and the prize table are prepared according to the switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning opening switch 39a in the lower winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal prize is executed. Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) (step X305). The winning number counter updating process (step X306) is performed to update. Then, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing is performed to monitor the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly by the special figure 1 variation display game (step X307).

  Next, the state scan counter is updated to designate in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring (step X308). This status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the status scan counter, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like If set, and the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, status scanning When the value of the counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X313). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the process proceeds to step X317. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine status check table 3 is prepared (step X314), and the status of the gaming machine is checked to determine whether an error has occurred. The process (step X315) is performed.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like It is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X316) is performed to set a busy signal flag based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the process moves to step X317. Since the processes of steps X314 to X316 are executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, the process of steps X314 to X316 is executed once in four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps X314 to X316 are performed every 16 ms.

  Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step X317) is performed to monitor detection of an abnormal input in the probability change operation area switch 38d, and a residual ball monitoring process (step X318) to monitor gaming balls remaining in the upper channel 38j. I do. Further, the discharge ball monitoring process (step X319) for monitoring the gaming balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended.

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 25 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step X317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area 38 h is in effect (step X 251). The fact that the probability variation operation area 38h is active means that the detection of the gaming ball with the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 7). If the positive variation actuation area 38h is active (step X251; Y), the process proceeds to step X258. If the positive variation operation area 38h is not valid (step X251; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the positive variation operation area switch (step X252).

  Then, if there is no input in the probability change operation area switch (step X252; N), the process proceeds to step X258. Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch (step X252; Y), processing for occurrence of V abnormal passage error is performed from step X253 onward. The probability changing operation area 38h can flow only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability changing operation area 38h. Then, the period during which the probability changing operation area switch 38d is effective starts when the lever member 38i is in the retracted state, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i becomes in the state covering the probability changing operation area 38h is the probability changing operation area When a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the positive change operation area 38h, the operation is ended. Therefore, the presence of an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d when the probability change operation region switch 38d is not effective is an abnormal state which normally does not occur, and processing regarding occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

  In the processing related to the V abnormal passage error generation, first, the initial value (here, a value corresponding to 60 seconds) is saved in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (step X253), and the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurring flag It is determined whether or not (step X254). Then, if the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurring flag (step X254; Y), that is, if an error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended.

  If the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not an error occurring flag (step X 254; N), that is, if it is determined that an error occurs in the current process, the error occurring flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag Step X255), prepare a V abnormal passage generation command (step X256). Thereafter, rendering command setting processing is performed (step X257), and the V abnormal passage monitoring processing is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error upon receipt of the V abnormal passage occurrence command.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step X258, it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step X258). Then, when the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step X258; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. In this case, the V abnormal passage error is not occurring. If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step X258; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by 1 (step X259), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step X260). ).

  If the V abnormal passage notification timer has not become 0 (step X260; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues. If the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step X260; Y), save the normal medium flag in the V abnormal passage flag area (step X261), and prepare a V abnormal passage cancellation command (step X262). . Thereafter, rendering command setting processing is performed (step X263), and the V abnormal passage monitoring processing is ended. The effect control device 300 performs processing to end the error notification in response to the reception of the V-abnormal passage cancellation command.

[Residual ball monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the remaining ball monitoring process (step X318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g for detecting gaming balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation area 38h (step X271). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step X271; N), the process moves to step X273. If there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step X271; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper channel 38j is not zero and updated by 1 (step X272), step X273 Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step X273), and when there is no input (step X273; N), the process proceeds to step X275. If there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step X273; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0 and updated by 1 (step X274). Migrate to X275.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the upper large winning opening switch (step X275), and if there is no input (step X275; N), the process proceeds to step X278. In addition, when there is an input on the upper large winning a prize opening switch (step X 275; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow path 38 j is updated by +1 (step X 276). The timer initial value is saved (step X277), and the process proceeds to step X278. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining that there is a remaining ball error when the gaming ball has stayed in the upper channel 38j for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the upper flow path 38 j and to be discharged without abnormality is set. In addition, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X 278). If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X 278; Y), that is, there is no gaming ball in the upper channel 38 j, the remaining ball is An error cancellation flag is prepared (step X284), a residual ball error cancellation command is prepared (step X285), and the process proceeds to step X286.

  On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step X278; N), that is, if there is a gaming ball in the upper channel 38j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is already occurring (step X279). If the residual ball error is already occurring (step X279; Y), the residual ball monitoring process is ended. If the remaining ball error is not occurring (step X279; N), the remaining ball monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step X280), and it is determined whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X281).

  If the remaining ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step X281; N), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. If the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X281; Y), a remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step X282), and a remaining ball error generation command is prepared (step X283). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step X286).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step X 286; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step X 286; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining ball error flag area (step X 287), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step X288), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting an error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error cancellation command.

  That is, by the above processing, even if a predetermined time (3 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the inflow of the last gaming ball into the upper flow passage 38j, the remaining game balls are not discharged from the upper flow passage 38j. It is determined that it is a sphere error. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as making a game ball (line fishing ball) attached with a thread remain in the upper flow passage 38j.

[Emission ball monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the discharge ball monitoring process (step X319) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects the game balls discharged from the lower flow passage 38k, that is, the game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 (Step X411). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step X411; N), the process proceeds to step X413. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step X411; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is not 0 and updated by 1 (step X412), step X413 Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects gaming balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation area 38h (step X413), and if there is no input (step X413; N), the process proceeds to step X416 Do. Further, when there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step X413; Y), the discharge ball counter managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step X414). The initial value is saved (step X415), and the process proceeds to step X416.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability changing operation area switch 38d for detecting gaming balls having flowed into the probability changing operation area 38h (step X416). . If there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step X416; Y), the discharge ball counter managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by 1 (step X417), and The timer initial value is saved (step X418), and the process proceeds to step X419.

  The passage opening switch 38g and the positive change operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting gaming balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k, and the discharge ball counter is incremented by 1 based on the detection of gaming balls with these switches. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining that a discharge ball error occurs when the gaming ball has stayed in the lower flow passage 38k for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the lower flow path 38 k and to be discharged without abnormality is set. In addition, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step X419), and if the discharge ball counter is 0 (step X419; Y), that is, if there is no gaming ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball is An error cancellation flag is prepared (step X425), and a discharge ball error cancellation command is prepared (step X426), and the process proceeds to step X427.

  On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step X419; N), that is, if there are gaming balls in the lower flow path 38k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error is already occurring (step X420). Then, if the discharge ball error is already occurring (step X420; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. If the discharge ball error is not occurring (step X420; N), the discharge ball monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step X421), and it is determined whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X422).

  If the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step X422; N), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. If the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X422; Y), a discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step X423), and a discharge ball error generation command is prepared (step X424). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step X427).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step X427; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step X 427; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step X 428), and effect command setting processing is performed. Then (step X429), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting an error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error cancellation command.

  That is, according to the above process, even if a predetermined time (3 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the inflow of the last gaming ball to the lower flow passage 38k, all the gaming balls are not discharged from the lower flow passage 38k. It is determined that it is a sphere error. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent action such as making a game ball (line fishing ball) attached with a thread remain in the lower flow passage 38k.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 28 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. The fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on the upper special winning opening switch 38 a of the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning switch 39 a of the second special variation winning device 39. As for the big prize winning opening (special variation winning combination devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to conduct fraudulently to open the opening door and insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of the prize. .

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch targeted for error monitoring is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening for error monitoring When the switch is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than the special gaming state in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of incorrect winnings after the addition is the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not 5) is exceeded (step X325).

  For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

  Then, if the judgment number is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). If the number of judged winnings is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of incorrect winnings is fixed to the number of false judgings (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target false winning notification timer area (step X 327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step X328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step X329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the winning balls is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the notification timer of interest is not 0, it is updated by 1 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero. In the present embodiment, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step X336), and set the fraud winning flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X 337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (Step X 338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step X339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X 338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step X340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step X342) The fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 29 shows winning number counter update processing (steps X306 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X 351), and input to the target winning opening switch (exactly input change ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether it overflows Step X 355). If no overflow occurs (step X 355; N), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 1 (step X 356), and the value of target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357). ). If an overflow occurs (step X 355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step X 359). When no overflow occurs (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether monitoring of all switches has ended (step X362). If an overflow occurs (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step X362).

  If monitoring of all switches has not ended (step X362; N), the process returns to the process (step X352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Processing command setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the fraud & prize monitoring process described above. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374) It is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X 375; Y), the process returns to step X 374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X 375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X 376), and the effect command setting process is ended.

  As described above, since the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step X307) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special view 1 variation display game in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3. It is also conceivable that no player or a player intentionally aiming to execute the special view 2 variable display game performs a right strike. In the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, a process for performing notification to urge such a player to perform a left strike is performed.

  In addition, the abnormal fluctuation here means the irregular fluctuation which is a special figure fluctuation display game which is not main. Even in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, winning to the second start winning opening 37 is possible, so even if it is an irregular change, it is a valid special view change display game, and a thread is attached It is different from cheating such as using a game ball or a magnet, launching a radio wave, or the like to illegally detect a winning and executing a special view variation display game. However, it is not preferable that the special figure variation display game is continued to be executed in the special figure variation display game which is determined to be mainly in the design of the gaming machine, and such irregular variation is detected here. The special figure 2 abnormal variation number is counted, and when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches a specified value, the corresponding processing is performed. Of course, even if a special figure 2 variation display game is executed, which causes irregular variation to be detected irregularly in the second start winning opening 37 by the use of gaming balls and magnets attached yarns, the launch of radio waves, etc. 2 Abnormal fluctuation numbers are counted. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a fraudulent act, the special figure 2 abnormal variation count is counted when the special figure 2 variation display game causing irregular variation is executed.

  In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is a main variation special figure (normal gaming state ST1 or second specified gaming state ST3) It is a flag. If the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X381; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is present (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (step X384), and if smaller than the prescribed value (step X384; Y), whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag It determines (step X387). In addition, when it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the state where the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation special figure (normal game state ST1 or 2nd specified game state ST3) If the special figure 2 abnormal variation number added by executing is not 0, -1 is updated (step X 385), the special figure 1 variation number is cleared to 0 (step X 386), and the special figure 2 variation check flag It is determined whether or not there is (step X 387). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to zero.

  The special figure 2 check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in a state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is a main variation special figure (normal gaming state ST1 or second specified gaming state ST3) It is a flag. In the determination (step X387) as to whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present, the process proceeds to step X390 where the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X387; N). If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step X389). (2) It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 5) (step X390).

  That is, the special figure 2 variation display game is started in a state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is a main variation special figure (normal gaming state ST1 or second specific gaming state ST3), that is, special variation Fig. 2 The special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the variable display game, and based on the setting of the special figure 2 check flag, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number forming the abnormal determination number is updated in the abnormal occurrence direction ( Here, it will be added. In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is a main variation special figure (normal gaming state ST1 or second specified gaming state ST3), that is, the special figure that becomes the main variation 1 Special figure 1 making the abnormal cancellation number on the basis of the fact that fluctuation indication game is started 1 renewal number (here the addition) changing number, the special figure 2 making the abnormal judgment number when the said abnormal cancellation number satisfies the specified condition The abnormal fluctuation number is updated (subtracted here) in the abnormal cancellation direction. Therefore, the game control apparatus 100 serves as abnormality determination number management means for updating the number of abnormality determinations in the direction of occurrence of abnormality based on the start of the non-main variation display game.

  If the number of abnormal fluctuations is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), the number of abnormal fluctuations is set to the specified value -1 (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is initialized to the initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, the player strikes the right despite being in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specified gaming state ST3 where it is recommended to advance left and play the game mainly with the special view 1 variation display game. In the case where the special view 2 variation display game is being executed, processing for giving a notification to urge the player to hit the left is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer is updated by 1 (step X395), and it is determined whether time is up (step X396) ). When the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended. When the time is up (step X396; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag is prepared (step X397), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is prepared (step X398).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step X399). Then, if the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area are the same (step X 399; Y), that is, there is no change in the state, the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is ended. Also, if the prepared flag and the value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area are not the same (step X 399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag It is determined whether or not (step X400).

  If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag (step X400; N), that is, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step X402) The effect command setting process is performed, and the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (step X400; Y), after the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), the processes of steps X402 and X403 are performed. (Step X403), the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal variation, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command with the special figure 2 cancellation of the abnormal variation is the effect control device It is transmitted to 300, and the start and the end of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification are set.

  In FIG. 32, FIG. 33, an example about the process by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process accompanying advancing of a game was shown. In the example shown in FIG. 32, in the normal game state ST1, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 and the special figure 1 variation number is 15. When the next special view 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the special view 1 variation count changes from 15 to 16. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t12), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number changes from 3 to 4.

  After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation count is updated by +1 (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches 18 which is the specified value (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0. Ru. Similarly, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches 18 which is the specified value (t17) The special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by 1 from -1 to 3 and changed to 2, and the special figure 1 variation number is cleared to zero. That is, every time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the specified number (here, 18 times) is executed, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted.

  FIG. 33 shows the case where the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 in the normal gaming state ST1. When the special view 2 variation display game is started from this state (t21), the special view 2 abnormal variation count is updated from 3 to 4. Furthermore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches 5 which is a specified value.

  Thereby, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, the external information which shows that special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurs based on this flag and the output of the game machine error state signal to the device outside the game machine are started, It becomes possible to grasp occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation with the management device etc of the game arcade. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display, voice or the like. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 form a response means for performing a predetermined response on the basis that the abnormality determination number (special figure 2 abnormality variation number) satisfies a predetermined condition (becomes a specified value).

  In addition, counting by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is started from the time when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches 5 which is the specified value (t22), and when a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t23) The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error status signal is stopped. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends notification of the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation based on the reception of this command.

  The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to a prescribed value -1 (here 4) after it is determined that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by reaching a prescribed value (5 in this case). Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game is newly started before the predetermined time elapses, the special figure 2 variation number becomes a specified value, and from that point in time counting of the predetermined time is newly started. Thus, when the special view 2 variation display game is executed despite the notification that the special view 2 abnormal variation has occurred, the period of the notification is extended accordingly.

  As described above, when it is determined that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaching a prescribed value (for example, 5), for example, the game ball enters the right game area unintentionally When the second start winning opening 37 has been won, it can be prevented that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is immediately determined. Furthermore, the special figure 2 abnormal variation which occurred about the winning of the 2nd starting winning opening 37 which is not intended by having performed special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the specified number of times is made to subtract special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number The number will be eliminated if a game is played after that, and it can be prevented that a mere mistake or the result of the game of another player is accumulated and determined to be the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

  In addition, the special value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number which will perform the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification, and the special value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number which will perform the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrary. It can be set. The respective specified values set here may be any values that allow the player not to aim for the start of the special view 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specified gaming state ST3. It may be any value. Also, if a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure. In addition, even when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation information is done, the prize balls are paid out normally for winning.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 34 shows gaming machine state check processing (steps X310, X312, X315) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine status check process, first, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is obtained (step X451), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and the state off command of the target is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). If the target signal is not on (step X 452: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X 452: Y), it is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step X459; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X 460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. Further, when the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is held at the value of -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  Then, if the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X 465; Y), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the rendering command setting process is performed. Then (step X467), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 35 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). If the payout busy signal is on (step X 471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X 474), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X 475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, it is determined whether there is a change of on or off (step X476). If it is the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If not (step X476; N), save the state of the current signal in the busy signal state area (step X477), clear the busy signal monitoring timer to 0 (step X478), and save the busy signal monitoring timer. +1 is updated (step X479).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the on-determined monitoring timer comparison value or the off-determined monitoring timer comparison value set previously, that is, whether the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) is reached (step X 480). If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is ended. Also, when the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the value of -1 of the on determination monitoring timer comparison value or the off determination monitoring timer comparison value previously set. At step X481, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  By this processing, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, and the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and thus noise It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes indeterminate until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X492). Then, it is judged whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning combination set when the big hit random number is acquired based on the winning on the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquiring process (step X493).

  If the start-up winning combination information is not set based on the winning on the first start-up winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process moves to step X499. In this case, no starting opening winning combination information is set. On the other hand, when the start-up winning combination information is set based on the winning on the first start winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether it is the normal gaming state or the second specified gaming state (step X494) ). Then, in the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state (step X494; Y), the process moves to step X497. If it is not the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state (step X494; N), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). Thereafter, a table for setting the information of suspension by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special view starting opening 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the effect control device 300, on the basis of the reception of the right strike instruction informing command, the right strike instruction informing the player to strike the right by display, voice or the like is performed. If it is other than the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, that is, in the first specific gaming state ST2 or the special gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to hit the right, and it is not possible to win unless it is left When a winning is detected at the first start winning opening 36, the right-handed instruction notification is performed.

  Next, start opening 2 (second start winning opening 37) prepares a prize monitoring table (step X 499), performs hard random number acquisition processing (step X 500), and wins a big hit random number based on winning on second starting winning opening 37 It is determined whether there is information on the starting opening winning combination set when acquired (step X501).

  If the start-up winning combination information is not set based on the winning on the second start-up winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the start-up opening switch monitoring process is ended. In this case, no starting opening winning combination information is set. On the other hand, if the start-up winning combination information is set based on the winning on the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether it is in the first specified gaming state (step X502). Then, if it is in the first specific gaming state (step X502; Y), it proceeds to step X507. If it is not the first specific gaming state (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the big hit, is in progress (step X503).

  If the jackpot is in progress (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the jackpot is not in progress (step X503; N), it is determined whether or not the first final change is in progress (step X504). During the first final change is during the execution of the special figure change display game for a predetermined number of times (100th in this case) after the first special game state is ended and the first specific game state is entered (including stop time) That is, it is in execution of the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the first specific gaming state is performed.

  If the first final change is in progress (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the first final change is not in progress (step X504; N), a left-handed command notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). Thereafter, a table for setting information on suspension by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step X507), the special view starting opening 2 switch processing is performed (step X508), and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the left hitting instruction notification command, the left hitting instruction notification instructing the player to hit the left by display, voice or the like is performed. In the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, a left strike is advantageous for the player, and a prize is detected at the second start winning opening 37 which is not to win unless it is a right strike. In the case, a left hit instruction notification is performed.

  In the first special game state, since the first special variation winning device 38 may be opened, the left hitting instruction notification is not performed. Moreover, in the special figure fluctuation display game executed last in the first specific gaming state, the game is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, but the game is in the low probability state during the game. Since the determination is made in the high probability state, there is a high possibility that the special game state will occur, and since the effect of the first specific game state is performed until the end of the game, the left hitting instruction notification is not performed ing.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 37 shows the hard random number acquisition process (steps X492 and X500) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start-up opening winning no information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to a target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. If the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the target hard random number latch register (step X515). Then, the start hole winning combination information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special view starting opening 1 switch processing (step X 498) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing. In this special view starting opening 1 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 1 output number which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening 36 to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523). Then, if the output number does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal 1 output number area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, although the number of times of output can be stored up to 255, when it is stored up to the upper limit, the value is looped to 0 due to +1 updating, so saving of the value after updating is not performed.

  If the special figure 1 reservation number is less than the upper limit (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of variation patterns in the special figure hold information determination process described later ( Step X526), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is calculated (step X 528), and the big hit random number prepared in the above hard random number acquisition processing is the big hit random number of RWM. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hitting symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in a fluctuation pattern random number storage area of RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure holding information determination process (step X534) which is the pre-reading process is performed, the decorative special figure holding number command corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number is prepared (step X535), and the effect command setting process is performed ( Step X536), The special view starting opening 1 switch processing ends. That is, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, and store the predetermined random number as the first start storage up to a predetermined upper limit number. Make a first start storage means.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
FIG. 39 shows the special view reservation information determination process (step X534) in the special view start port 1 switch process described above. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special view 1 start storage prior to the start timing of the special view 1 change display game based on the special view 1 start storage. In this special view suspension information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific gaming state (step X541), and when it is the first specific gaming state (step X541; Y), the special view suspension information determination process finish. If it is not the first specific gaming state (step X541; N), it is determined whether the player is in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit, that is, the special hitting state based on the big hit (step X542).

  If the jackpot is in progress (step X 542: Y), the processing for determining the special image holding information ends. If the big hit is not in progress (step X542; N), a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is determined by whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table (step X545), and acquire stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number (step X546), The prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), small hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547) ). Then, if the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), stop symbol information of the removal is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), rendering command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, special figure 1 information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and special figure 1 variation pattern setting for setting a variation aspect of the special figure 1 variation display game The process is performed (step X554).

  Then, the prefetch change pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is prepared (step X555). The process is executed (step X556), and the special figure hold information determination process is ended. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of special figure 1 ordinary processing. Is the same as

  According to the above process, it includes a prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special view 1 change display game based on the special view 1 start storage, and information of change pattern in the special view 1 change display game based on the special view 1 start storage. The look-ahead fluctuation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetching result) of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or small hit or the variation pattern type) corresponding to the special figure 1 starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 starting memory It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decoration special view start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the start of the special view 1 variation display game As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the related information before the timing.

  That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control apparatus 100 may determine the result of the first change display game and the change mode information before the start of the first change display game. It is the first possible means of determination. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start storage in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

  In addition, this special view reservation information determination process is performed only for the special view 1 variable display game, and does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special view change display game. It does not happen. In addition, when it is in the 1st specified game state, it is made not to do pre-reading processing. This is a state in which the first specific gaming state is mainly based on the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed by deriving the special result in the special figure 2 variable display game. It is because it is almost always stopped by the result. That is, there is little meaning in notifying the prefetching result because most are outliers, and it is forcibly changed to the outlier result after informing the prefetching result that is the special result in the special view 1 variable display game. Inconsistencies may arise.

  However, for the special view 2 change display game, since the start memory for holding the start of the special view 2 change display game is not generated, the special start while the first specified memory is in the first period of the first specified gaming state It is highly likely that only the variable display game shown in FIG. 1 is performed, and in such a case, the pre-reading effect may be performed for the first start storage. Of the first start memories that perform such pre-reading effects, pre-reading processing is performed for those that occurred before the start of the first specified gaming state, so using that result, it occurs after the start of the first specified gaming state With regard to those that have been subjected to such pre-reading effect, it is arranged to perform pre-reading processing. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and another process may be performed to determine whether or not to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure starting mouth 2 switch processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special view starting opening 2 switch processing (step X508) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing. In this special view starting opening 2 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 2 output number of times which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening 37 to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563). Then, if the output number does not overflow (step X563; N), save the updated value in the start opening signal 2 output number area of RWM (step X 564) and start opening 2 (second start winning opening 37) winning combination Determine if it is invalid.

  In the starting opening 2 winning a prize ineffective, during the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation indication game which becomes special result (the big hit or the small hit) (during processing during the special figure indication which is mentioned later), during 1st or 2nd special game state The special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. When the starting opening 2 winning combination is ineffective (step X 565; Y), the special view starting opening 2 switch processing is ended. If the start opening 2 winning combination is not ineffective (step X565; N), set the number of special figure 2 reservations to 1 (step X566) and calculate the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 (step X567) The jackpot random number prepared in the above-described hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Furthermore, the small hitting symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special view starting opening 2 switch process is ended. That is, based on the inflow of gaming balls to the second start winning opening 37, the game control device 100 forms a start winning storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number. In the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern random number 1 is not used because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special view 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed under the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether or not (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103) ). Moreover, when it is during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y103.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Perform processing to monitor detection. In special figure 1 game processing, special winning opening switch monitor processing is performed for the special gaming state executed based on the result of special figure 1 fluctuation display game becoming big hit or small hit, special figure 2 fluctuation display The special game state to be executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit is performed a special winning opening switch monitoring process in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the processing proceeds to step Y119 and the subsequent processing is performed. In addition, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special view 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special view 1 game process number is made (step Y107).

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special Special processing 1 usual processing (step Y108) which sets the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 1 during fluctuation is done. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “1”, the special figure 1 setting of the stop display time, the special figure 1 for performing the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 etc. 1) Perform a process during fluctuation (step Y109).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" at step Y107, and if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of fanfare command according to the type of big hit, each big hit type The special figure 1 display process (step Y110) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the special winning opening pattern, set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

  If the special processing 1 game processing number is "3" at step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / during interval processing (step Y111). If the special figure 1 game processing number is "4" in step Y107, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, if it is the final round, the processing for setting the ending command, or the special winning opening A special winning opening open process (step Y112) is performed to set information required to perform the remaining ball process.

  At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, Special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) to perform setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108), etc. I do.

  In step Y107, when the special processing 1 game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing The small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y115) is performed to set the information necessary for the above. If the special processing 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, the small hitting middle processing (step Y116) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing. Do.

  At step Y107, when the special processing 1 game processing number is "9", the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y117) is performed to set information required to perform the process. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y120) according to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game process ends. The special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special view 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and setting of display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed under the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1, that is, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether it is (step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated to -1 if it is not 0 Step Y133). Moreover, when it is during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), it transfers to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Perform processing to monitor detection. In special figure 2 game processing, it is made to do big winning a prize mouth switch supervisory processing concerning the special game state which is executed when the result of special figure 2 variable indication game becomes big hit or small hit, special figure 1 variable indication In the special game state to be executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 1 game process described above.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special view 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y 134; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is long. The fluctuation timer value (in this case, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specified gaming state ST3, the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specified gaming state The fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game in ST3 is a very long time (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by plural times of counting using the number of repetitions which is the number of times of counting the specified time (here, 60000 ms).

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is made (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y 138, the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting and effect setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, Special figure 2 usual processing (step Y139) which does the setting etc of the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 2 fluctuation is done. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” in step Y 138, the special figure 2 is used to set the stop display time and to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2) Perform a process during fluctuation (step Y140).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "2" at step Y138, and if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of fanfare command according to the type of big hit, each big hit type The special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the special winning opening pattern, set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

  If the special processing 2 game processing number is "3" at step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / during interval processing (step Y142). At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing for setting the ending command in the final round, or the special winning opening A special winning opening open process (step Y143) is performed to set information required to perform the remaining ball process.

  At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the special figure 2 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process. If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) is performed to set information etc. necessary to perform the special figure 2 routine process (step Y108). I do.

  When special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step Y138, setting of opening time and opening pattern of big winning opening when small hit occurs, setting of fanfare command, and processing during small hit The small hit fanfare middle process (step Y146) is performed to set the necessary information. If the special processing 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, the small hitting middle processing (step Y147) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing. Do.

  At step Y138, when the special processing 2 game processing number is "9", the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y148) is performed to set information required to perform the process. At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing.

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. The game process is ended. This special view 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special view 2 variable display game). The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process described above. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is open (step Y161). Then, if the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper large winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball processing of the upper large winning opening is in progress (step Y162). The residual ball processing in this determination includes both the big winning opening residual ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit residual ball processing based on the small hit.

  When the remaining ball processing of the upper large winning a prize mouth is in progress (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when remaining ball processing of upper large winning a prize mouth is not under (step Y162; N), it judges whether or not lower large winning a prize mouth (the 2nd special fluctuation winning a prize device 39) is open (step Y163). Then, if the lower large winning opening is not open (step Y163; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the lower large winning opening is open (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step Y164).

  Note that opening in steps Y161 and Y163 means opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and a special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit) Including both being open in the second special game state. Further, the determination in steps Y161 to Y163 may be made with reference to the special view 1 or special view 2 game processing number, or flags may be set to indicate whether they are in the respective states, It may be determined based on this flag.

  When there is no input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; Y), 1 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of winning to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  On the other hand, if the upper large winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or if the remaining large ball opening is being processed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0 in step Y166. Set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper large winning opening switch (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y175.

  If there is an input on the upper prize winning opening switch (step Y167; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variation winning device 38, a special winning opening count command is transmitted to produce effects by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y176; Y) or when the small hitting remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y177; Y) If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y 175; N), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y 176; N), and the small hitting remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y 177; N) The value of the counter is added to the special winning opening count number (step Y178), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (here, 9) (step Y179; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the special winning opening count is limited to the upper limit (step Y180), and the target figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot is open during the big hit, that is, whether it is the opening in the first special game state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  If the jackpot is not open (step Y 182; N), that is, if the jackpot is open, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value of the big hit opening operation end is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

  In addition, when there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; Y), a large winning opening count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 as well. In addition, when there is a remaining ball processing for the lower winning prize opening, a special winning opening count command is sent to the effect control device 300 even when the lower winning prize opening switch is input during the remaining ball processing. You may

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which the special view 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special view 2 fluctuation display game which is a big hit or a small hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that although the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state where fluctuation can not be started, in that case, special figure 1 normal processing is not being executed. , Here, it is not necessary to judge about this.

  If the special figure 1 can not start changing (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is ended. If the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handling instruction notification has been made, that is, whether the left-handling instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left hit instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process moves to step Y206. If the left hit instruction notification has not been made (step Y202; N), a left hit instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). After that, the left hitting indication notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (step Y206). The left strike instruction notification flag is cleared when the special view variation display game lastly performed in the first specific gaming state is ended, whereby the left strike instruction when transitioning to the normal gaming state Notification will be performed.

  And when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (Step Y206; Y), it shifts to Step Y217. If the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed to set information on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (step Y210), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y211) , Effect command setting processing (step Y212). In addition, at the time of performing processing (step Y210) for preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. A number-of-holds command corresponding to the special view 1 number of holds minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special view status indicates the state of the special view variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates that only the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, The special view status 2 indicates that only the special view 2 variation display game is being executed. Further, the special view status 3 indicates that both the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are being executed, and the special view status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special view status 5 indicates that the special game state is a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special view 1 variation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special view status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific gaming state (step Y213). And when it is a 1st specification game state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether or not the first final change is in progress (step Y214). During the first final change is during the execution of the special figure change display game for a predetermined number of times (100th in this case) after the first special game state is ended and the first specific game state is entered (including stop time) That is, it is in execution of the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the first specific gaming state is performed.

  If the first final change is in progress (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the first final change is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special view 1 change check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special view 1 variation display game is started in the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state, the special view 1 variation check flag is set. Thereafter, special processing 1 during fluctuation processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and special processing 1 normal processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 routine process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special view 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not between the stop of fluctuation of the special view 1 fluctuation display game which is a big hit or small hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state where it can not start changing, in that case it is a state where special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , Here, it is not necessary to judge about this.

  If the special figure 2 can not start changing (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 routine processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 routine processing is ended. If the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 reserve number is 0 (step Y222). In addition, as mentioned above, special figure 2 suspension (the 2nd starting memory) is based on the particular winning a prize when there is a winning to the 2nd starting winning a prize opening 37 in the state which can start the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game It is temporarily generated to perform start processing of the special view 2 variable display game, and is not for holding the start of the special view change display game as in the first start storage.

  Then, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 variation start processing is performed to set information etc. regarding the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y225), and the special figure 2 variation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special view 2 variation display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special view status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific gaming state (step Y227). And when it is a 1st specification game state (step Y227; Y), it transfers to step Y230. If it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether or not the first final change is in progress (step Y228). During the first final change is during the execution of the special figure change display game for a predetermined number of times (100th in this case) after the first special game state is ended and the first specific game state is entered (including stop time) That is, it is in execution of the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the first specific gaming state is performed.

  If the first final change is in progress (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the first final change is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special view 2 change check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state. Thereafter, special processing 2 variation processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y230), and the special processing 2 routine processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reserve number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reserve number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y 231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the process of change (step Y 232). Then, if the special figure 1 is not moving (step Y232; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and if it is not disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state Perform processing related to setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y 231; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y 232; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y 233; Y) , Step Y237.

  In the processing for setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), and the customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). A command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process moves to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  In addition, when the effect control device 300 is restarted due to any cause, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the gaming state, so that it is not possible to perform appropriate effects, but the customer By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform effects according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and it is possible that the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state is transmitted. It is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be simultaneously executed, and it is also conceivable that the probability state changes due to the processing for the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special view variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thus, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

  In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command at each start of the special view fluctuation display game, even when the effect control device 300 is restarted, from the reception of this command, an effect according to the gaming state is performed. It is possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state more quickly than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. The customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal process described above. This special view 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special view 1 change display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and outlier information as result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y 242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y 243) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set 1 Information setting process (step Y 244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of fluctuation patterns of the special drawing 1 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y245).

  Thereafter, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The process (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Then, after that, a process is performed to adjust so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game that can be executed simultaneously.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived on the other hand, the other is forced to leave regardless of the lottery result. It is supposed to end as a result. In particular, since the special figure 2 variation display game always becomes a big hit or a small hit, when the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped first, such processing is performed for the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, for example, although rendering with a high degree of expectation is performed in the special view 1 variation display game, the player is forced to be stopped as a result of the disconnection, and the player has a sense of distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game may end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now, it is possible to take measures such as not to select an effect with high expectation. It is like that.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the first specified gaming state (step Y248), if it is the first specified gaming state (step Y248; Y), it proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the first specific gaming state, the game is a state in which the game is advanced mainly by the special view 2 variable display game. In this state, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is short and executed with high frequency, it is known that the special figure 1 variation display game has a high possibility of being forcibly stopped by the result of the disconnection. In the special view 1 variation display game, special processing is not performed here because it is preset so that a high expectation effect is not selected.

  If it is not the first specific gaming state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the first final change is in progress (step Y249). During the first final change is during the execution of the special figure change display game for a predetermined number of times (100th in this case) after the first special game state is ended and the first specific game state is entered (including stop time) That is, it is in execution of the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the first specific gaming state is performed.

  If the first final change is in progress (step Y249; Y), the process moves to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 variation display game which is the first final variation is stopped in a short time, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected for the special view 1 fluctuation display game, the process ends before the start of the effect, so here, the process for preventing the effect with a high degree of expectation from being selected Do not do.

  If the first final change is not in progress (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is in change (step Y250). When the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y250; N), it transfers to step Y257. In this case, since it is the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a very long variation time even if the special figure 2 variation display game is started from this. Therefore, since the possibility that the special view 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped is low, the process for preventing the selection of the effect having a high degree of expectation is not performed here.

  When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is four or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is ended earlier, so that the effect with a high degree of expectation is not selected. Do not process.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y 252; N), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (step Y 253), and the special figure 1 variation display to be executed from now is It is determined whether the variation time of the game is less than the remaining variation time of the special view 2 variation display game (step Y254). If the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game to be executed is less than the remaining variation time of the special view 2 variation display game (step Y254; Y), the process moves to step Y257. In this case, since the special view 1 variation display game is ended earlier, the process for preventing the effect having a high degree of expectation from being selected is not performed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it notifies that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y256). Thereafter, high probability change number of times update processing is performed to manage the period in which the high probability state is set (step Y257), and the special view 1 change start processing is ended. In the effect control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer, processing such as restricting selection of an effect with a high degree of expectation for the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process of resetting information related to the fluctuation pattern (front / rear fluctuation pattern number or the like) may be performed to change the effect control device 300 to a fluctuation pattern not selecting a high expectation effect. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process (step Y255) of preparing a command to notify that the fluctuation time in the special view 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

  That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100 is for the second fluctuation display game when the fluctuation mode information including the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game is determined in the normal gaming state. The first variation mode determination means can determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process of resetting the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is a second fluctuation display game when the fluctuation mode information including the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game is determined by the first fluctuation mode determining means. Is being executed, information on the variation pattern is determined without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. The second variation mode determining means can be redetermined.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern determined once in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y254), and the fluctuation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning You may do so.

  In addition, when it is possible to select the outlier result as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now only when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a special result A process (step Y254) of determining whether it is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special view 2 variable display game is out, this processing is not necessary because the special view 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the release.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 usual process. The special view 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special view 2 change display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and outlier information as result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y 262) is performed to set the big hit information or the small hit information.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 2 Information setting process (step Y 264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of fluctuation patterns of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

  Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of fluctuation start of special figure 2 fluctuation display game The process (step Y 267) is performed. By these processes, the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, high probability change number of times update processing is performed to manage the period in which the high probability state is set (step Y268), and the special view 2 change start processing is ended.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a process for adjusting the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which can be executed simultaneously, so as not to cause inconvenience is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special view 1 variation display game is low, so there are few opportunities for the special view 2 variation display game to be forcibly ended by the result of the removal. However, as in the case of the special view 1 variation display game, when the game is forcibly stopped by the result of out-of-range, the selection of the rendering with a high degree of expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
FIG. 48 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y 242) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y 271), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y 272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (step Y 273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit (step Y 275), and if it is a big hit (step Y 275; Y), it proceeds to step Y 279 Do. That is, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed simultaneously are not considered to be a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y 275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y 276) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not The small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. In this case, outlier information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y 291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y 292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit (step Y 295), and if it is a big hit (step Y 295; Y), it proceeds to step Y 299 Do. That is, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed simultaneously are not considered to be a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y 295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y 296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.

  Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y 296) is a big hit (step Y 297; Y), the big hit information is saved by overwriting the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area saved with the out information at step Y 292 (step Y 298) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y 296) is not a big hit (step Y 297; N), whether or not the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether the small hit judgment value matches. Small hit determination processing (step Y 299) to determine

  Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 299) is a small hit (step Y 300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step Y 291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. In this case, outlier information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 50 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this big hit determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a judgment result is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. In addition, with the omission as a judgment result, it shows that it fell out to the lottery of the big hit. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

  Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step Y316). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316) .

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as a judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 51 shows small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hitting determination process, it is first determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step Y321). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is not higher than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a gap is set as the judgment result (step Y326) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. In addition, with the result as a judgment result, it shows that it fell out to the lottery of a small hit. Also, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y 321; N), it is judged whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed, that is, the judgment about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (Step Y322).

  Then, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step Y322; Y), the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), the value of the target big hit random number is the small hitting upper limit judgment value It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y322; N), that is, when it is the determination about the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324) It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit judgment value (step Y 325).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y 325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y 327) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The special symbol 1 variation display game is saved not in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area but in the special symbol 1 stop symbol evacuation area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game There is a possibility that it will be forced to be changed to the result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y 337), and the special winning opening open information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired The special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y 338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339). If it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special view 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special view 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y 339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y 344), and the off stop symbol pattern is special figure 1 stop The symbol pattern area is saved (step Y345), and the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 349), and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y 350). One small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y 351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed for the special figure 2 as a target. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y 361), and if it is a big hit (step Y 361; Y), the big hit symbol random number from the special symbol 2 big hit symbol storage area Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired and it saves in the special figure 2 stop design evacuation territory (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the special symbol 2 variation display game is saved not in the special symbol 2 stop symbol region but in the special symbol 2 stop symbol withdrawal region when the special result is derived in the special symbol 1 variation display game There is a possibility that it will be forced to be changed to the result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening open information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired It saves in the special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening information field (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y 361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y 369). If it is a small hit (step Y 369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special view 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special view 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y 369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y 374), and the off stop symbol pattern is special figure 2 stop The symbol pattern area is saved (step Y 375), and the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y 376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), and the special figure 2 big hit design random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380). The area is cleared to 0 (step Y 381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special view 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific gaming state (step Y401). If it is not the first specific gaming state (step Y401; N), set the variation pattern selection information table (step Y402), obtain the first half offset data, the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern (step It is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  When it is special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; Y), it moves to step Y412. If the special figure 1 big hit is not detected (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). Then, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is a release, the process proceeds to step Y407. When the special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 reserve number is for the first half offset data. The values are added and converted (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  On the other hand, if it is the first specific gaming state (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y408). Then, when it is not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; N), set the first half offset data for the special figure 1 in the first specific gaming state for the shift and small hit (step Y409), the second half for special figure 1 length variation Offset data is set (step Y411). Also, when it is special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for special figure 1 big hit in the first specific game state is set (step Y410), the second half offset data for special figure 1 length fluctuation Are set (step Y411).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). End the setting process.

  That is, in the special game 1 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state and the second specific game state, in the case of a small hit, a fluctuation pattern taking into consideration the number of special drawing 1 reservations for both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern is determined In the case of loss, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 reserve number only in the first half variation pattern, and in the case of the big hit, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 reserve number Make it Further, in the special view 1 variation display game in the first specific gaming state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special view 1 reservation number.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y 264) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special view 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first specific gaming state (step Y421). If it is the first specific gaming state (step Y421; Y), set the variation pattern selection information table (step Y422), obtain the first half offset data, the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern ( The step moves to step Y428).

  On the other hand, if it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). Then, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y424; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 and the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state and the second specific gaming state are set (step Y425). The second half offset data for variation is set (step Y427). In the case of special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), set the first half offset data for special figure 2 big hit in the normal gaming state and the second specific gaming state (step Y426), and for special figure 2 length variation The second half offset data is set (step Y427).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429). End the setting process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452) Then, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) of Special Figure 1 and prepared (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is dislocated, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the dislocated stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is dislocated (step Y454; Y), 2-byte distribution processing is performed (Step Y455), it transfers to step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not deviated (step Y454; N), distribution processing is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is a release, the distribution value is 2 bytes in order to enable various effects.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y 457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for number of reservations 1) of Special Figure 1. Prepare (step Y 458). Then, distribution processing (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step Y460). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of Special Figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).

  Thereafter, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first half fluctuation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the former half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the second half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y 471), and the address of the second half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y 472) Then, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 and prepared (step Y 473).

  Next, distribution processing is performed (step Y 474), and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step Y 475). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Then, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y 478), and variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of Toku 2 and prepared (step Y 479) ).

  Thereafter, distribution processing (step Y480) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 variation display game, since there are few types of second half variation, the second half variation group is not selected by the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern is determined using only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 58 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step Y455) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing described above. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half change group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step Y501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but defines the second half fluctuation pattern group in which only the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the variation group table, since there is no need for sorting, a sorting value “0”, that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

  Then, if the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y 373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y 504), and the calculated new random number value Is smaller than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distributed value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value defined next in the variation group selection table is obtained in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted by using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step Y505, and further new disturbance A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the second half fluctuation group table. When it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step Y507), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 59 shows the sorting process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process described above. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half change selection table (selection table) or the first half change selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, "0"). (Step Y511). Here, the second-half fluctuation selection table and the first-half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or first-half fluctuation pattern as in the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table without any, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y517), End the process. On the other hand, when the first data of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value defined first in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table To obtain (step Y513).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) (step Y514), and then the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

  That is, after the distribution value defined next in the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table is obtained in step Y513, the divided random value is determined as a new random number value and the distribution value is subtracted in step Y515. , And further calculate new random numbers (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y). Thus, any one of the second-half fluctuation number and the first-half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or the first-half fluctuation pattern defined in the second-half fluctuation selection table or the first-half fluctuation selection table. Then, if it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step Y517), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 60 shows fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247 and Y267) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing described above. In this variation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y551), and when the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for holding number 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). When the information setting in the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y551; N), that is, when the information setting in the special figure 2 is being performed, the random number storage area of the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 in the special figure 2 is cleared (step Y553).

  Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558), and the addition value is saved in the target figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

  In the special game 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state and the second specific gaming state, when the result is a break or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, using the number of repetitions which is the number of times to count a specified time (here, 60000 ms) as the above added value, the remainder time (time less than 60000 ms) excluding the time that can be timed is calculated as the added value It is supposed to be

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y560), and when the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y560; Y), the process moves to step Y564. If the information setting in the special view 1 is not in progress (step Y560; N), that is, if the information setting in the special view 2 is in progress, it is determined whether the start of the long variation in the special view 2 is (step Y561). The long fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern set when the result is a break or a small hit in the normal gaming state and the second specific gaming state for the special view 2 fluctuation display game, and is determined by the number of the fluctuation pattern set. .

  Then, if it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, if the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

  Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y566) ). Next, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y567), and when the information setting of the special view 1 is not being performed (step Y567; N), the variation start information setting process is ended. In addition, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step Y 567; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by −1 (step Y 568), and the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 are shifted (step Y 569) And clears the free space after shift (step Y 570), and ends the variation start information setting process.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, the game control apparatus 100 determines the result of the first variable display game (special view 1 variable display game) and the fluctuation mode information as the first fluctuation display game. The first means of determination that can be determined before the start of Further, the game control apparatus 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, and the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the predetermined random number. And variation aspect information as a second determination means capable of being determined before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball fired to one side of the gaming area 32 can be won, and the second starting winning opening 37 is released to the other side of the gaming area 32 The game ball is disposed at a position where winning is possible, and the fluctuation mode information of the fluctuation display game includes information on fluctuation time that can specify the execution time of the fluctuation display game, and in the normal state (normal gaming state) The fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display game by the second determination means is more than the fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game by the first determination means It will be long.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game For example, a variation command including information on a pattern may be mentioned. In addition, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Moreover, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and fluctuation mode information of the first fluctuation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game determined by the second determination means As transmission means that can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). In addition, for each of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time in response to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time exceeds the fluctuation time. It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In the special game 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state and the second specific gaming state, when the result is a break or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, The information about the fluctuation time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a command indicating only the long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of the long fluctuation, it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail as long as the fluctuation display is simply performed. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the command indicating the long fluctuation. Management of the fluctuation time is performed only with the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuation display based on the reception of the stop command. Let's do it. In this way, the burden of control in the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
FIG. 61 shows the high probability change number updating process (steps Y257 and Y268) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the high probability change number update process, first, it is determined whether the high probability is in progress (step Y581). When the high probability change is not in progress (step Y581; N), the high probability change number update process is ended. Also, if the high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), the high probability fluctuation number of managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability fluctuation number Is judged to be 0 (step Y 583).

  If the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (step Y 583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. When the high probability fluctuation number is 0 (step Y 583; Y), that is, when the high probability state is ended, signals relating to the high probability state and the end of time saving are saved in the external information output data area (step Y 584). Here, it is set to turn off the jackpot 2 signal. Further, the signals relating to the high probability state and the end of the short time are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF.

  Further, the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability and time saving none flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the final change flag corresponding to the symbol which starts changing and the ending game state (first specified game state or second specified game state) is set (step Y 588), and the positive change operation area passing information area is cleared (step Y589), finish the high probability variation frequency update process. In addition, the information of the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared when the result is a big hit in the special figure 1 display process, the special figure 2 display process in addition to this process, or when the game machine is powered on. Become.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display Since the game can be executed simultaneously, the high probability change number update process of managing the number of high probability states is performed at the start of the special figure change display game. As in the prior art, in the case of a gaming machine in which one special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed while the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the probability state is There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, when it is possible to execute the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is low when the special view variation display game is finished a predetermined number of times. If changing to the state, the determination is also made in the high probability state until the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over a predetermined number of times It becomes possible to execute the game in the state. Therefore, when it is possible to simultaneously execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure fluctuation display game, which is a predetermined number of times, is in high probability state After the determination, it is necessary to set the low probability state before the start of the other special figure variation display game, and here, immediately after the processing at the start of the one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times is completed. It is possible to change to the low probability state.

  As described above, since the high probability change number of times update process is performed at the start of the special figure change display game, the last special figure change display game for which the lottery in the high probability state is performed is the change of the special figure change display game. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if other processes perform processing with reference to the actual probability state during the variable display of the special figure fluctuation display game, processing may be performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the final variation flag is set so that the special view variation display game can be treated as a game being executed as a high probability state. In addition, the final change flag is the first special game state or the second special game state whether it is the last special figure change display game in which the lottery is performed, the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change It contains information that can be used to determine which of the displayed games it is. In the present embodiment, the final change flag for the last special view change display game in which the lottery in the first specific gaming state is performed is referred to as a first final change flag, and the lottery in the second specific gaming state is The final variation flag for the last special view variation display game performed is referred to as a second final variation flag.

[Special figure 1 during process transition setting process]
FIG. 62 shows the process shift setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 during special figure 1 processing. In this special figure 1 during process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blinker timer) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms is set (step Y606). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 in-change symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 in-change processing transition setting process is ended.

  During the special figure 1 variation, the initial value to be set in the symbol number area is 0, so that the variation indication is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 during process transition setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the process shift setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 during the special figure 2 normal process. In the special figure 2 in-process change processing setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, save the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y 615), the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) For example, 100 ms is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set to the special figure 2 in-change symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 in-change processing transition setting process is ended.

  During the special figure 2 variation, the initial value to be set in the symbol number area is 0, so that the variation display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

  When the variable display is started on the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, it is assumed that all segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode in any of the result modes, or if there is a segment not used in any of the result modes, the variable display is started from the state of lighting at least the segment You may do it. Also, the variable display may be started from the state in which the same one segment is always lighted each time. Moreover, the lighting aspect at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be same or different.

[Process during special figure 1 change]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by +1 (step Y 621), and a command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y 622). Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y 624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y 625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is also a case where the game is forcibly stopped earlier than the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is sent to the effect control device 300 .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the final change of the first specified gaming state (step Y626). When the special view 1 change display game is the final change of the first specific gaming state, the first final change flag of the special view 1 is set. Then, if it is not the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. If it is the final change of the first specified gaming state (step Y626; Y), the display time of the final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. In addition, as a display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here, if it is not the final fluctuation of the first specific gaming state, 600 ms in case of losing, 2000 ms in case of big hit, small hit In the case of, the display time of 136 ms is set. Further, in the case of the final change of the first specified gaming state, the display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is off (step Y629). If the special figure 1 deviates (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 does not deviate (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y630). Note that whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special view status.

  And, when the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game is not under execution (step Y630; N), it moves to step Y640. When the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is in progress (step Y631). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 1 variable display game becoming a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forced to be stopped at the out result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has already ended the fluctuation display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it becomes the target of the forced stop.

  If the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y 631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y 633. If the special figure 2 is not being processed (step Y 631; N), the number of symbol determination times output is updated by 1 (step Y 632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special view 1 + 4 ms as the display time of the special view 2, the display times of the special view 1 and the special view 2 simultaneously end. In addition, even when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, save the display time in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y 634), load and prepare a command from the decorative special view 2 command area (step Y 635), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y 636). ). Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and special figure 2 display process transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y639).

  Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and save it in the hit symbol command area (step Y 640), and whether it is the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is the small hit Is determined (step Y641). When it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), it transfers to step Y644. Also, when the special figure 1 small hit (step Y 641; N), ie, when it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y 642) ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y 644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y 645). End processing while displaying.

[Special figure 2 during processing]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 2 during fluctuation process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by +1 (step Y651), and the special figure 2 command is loaded from the command area and prepared (step Y652). Perform (step Y653).

  Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the final change of the first specified gaming state (step Y656). When the special figure 2 variation display game is the final variation of the first specific gaming state, the first final variation flag of the special figure 2 is set.

  Then, if it is not the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. If it is the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the final change is set (step Y658), and the process moves to step Y659. In addition, as the display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is set here, if it is not the final fluctuation of the first specified gaming state, regardless of the result, it is 600ms and the final fluctuation of the first specified gaming state In some cases, the display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a removal (step Y659). When the special figure 2 deviates (step Y659; Y), it transfers to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not deviated (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y660). Note that whether or not the special view 1 variation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special view status.

  And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation indicatory game is not under execution (step Y660; N), it moves to step Y670. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 2 variable display game becoming a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forced to be stopped at the out result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has already ended the fluctuation display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it becomes a target of forced stop.

  If the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y 661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y 664. When the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y 661; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by 1 (step Y 662), and the process proceeds to step Y 664.

  Next, save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), load and prepare a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y666) ). Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and save it in the hit symbol command area (step Y 670), and whether it is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is the small hit Is determined (step Y671). When it is the special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), it moves to step Y674. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672) ), Information is loaded from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y 674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting processing 1 is performed (step Y 675). End processing while displaying.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 66 shows the process shift setting process 1 (step Y645) during the special figure 1 display in the special figure 1 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the special figure 1 game process number area is processed number Save (step Y682).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag region (step Y684) Special process 1) during process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 67 shows the process shift setting process 1 (step Y 675) during the special figure 2 display in the special figure 2 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed number Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag region (step Y694) Special process 2) during process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2]
FIG. 68 shows the process shift setting process 2 (step Y 669) during the special figure 1 display in the special figure 2 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y 701), and the special figure 1 game process number area is processed number Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

  The process up to this point is the same as in the special process 1 during process transition setting process 1 described above, and thereafter, information is set to be a result of outliers. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, clear the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y 707), save the shift information in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y 708), save the shift information in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y 709) ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), the shift figure stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 69 shows the process shift setting process 2 (step Y639) during the special figure 2 display in the special figure 1 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed number Save (step Y722).

  Next, save the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y 724).

  The process up to this point is the same as the above-mentioned process of setting transition to processing 1 during special image 2 display, and thereafter, information is set to be a result of the removal. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y 725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y 726).

  Next, clear the special figure 2 big winning a prize opening open information territory (step Y727), save gap information in the small hitting flag 2 territory (step Y728), save gap information in the big hit flag 2 territory (step Y729) ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), the special figure 2 stop symbol area is saved and the stop symbol number is saved (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is ended. .

  By the processing of FIG. 64 to FIG. 69 described above, when one special figure fluctuation display game results in a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped at the out-of-focus result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game becoming a special result, a first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped at the out result, and the special figure 2 variable display game is a special result. As a result, the second end control process is performed in which the special view 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped on the basis of the out result.

  From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. A first variable display game in which execution control is performed when a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) whose execution control is being performed by the control means (game control apparatus 100) becomes a special result Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control unit is executed by the first variation display game execution control unit when execution control of the second variation display game is performed. If the first variable display game being controlled results in a special result, it is possible to end the second variable display game that is performing the execution control as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. In this way, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped by the result of the unbalance, and even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed, no problem occurs. Can be

[Process while displaying special figure 1]
FIGS. 70 and 71 show the process of displaying the special view 1 in the special view 1 game process described above (step Y110). In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), the small hit flag Clear one area (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y 753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y 754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y 755; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON), the feature continuous operating device operating, regarding the start of the special game 1 variable display game The medium signal is on, and the special symbol 1 signal is on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y757), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the number-of-rounds upper limit table is set (step Y759), and the number-of-rounds upper limit (12, 5 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit value information is acquired Save (step Y760). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the special drawing 1 stop design pattern is hit and prepared from the design command area (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of becoming a big hit in the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, clear the probability variation operation area passing information area (step Y 769), clear the upper large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area (step Y 770), save the fraud monitoring over time flag in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (Step Y771). Furthermore, the lower large winning a prize opening illegal winning a prize number territory is cleared (step Y772), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag territory (step Y773), it moves to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the special processing 1 game processing number area is saved (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y 755; N) at step Y 755, ie, if the big hit flag 1 is disengaging information, it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). To do (step Y777). Then, if the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y 777; Y), it is determined whether it is the final change (step Y 778). The final fluctuation here includes both the first final fluctuation and the second final fluctuation. That is, during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) after the first special gaming state is ended and the first or second specific gaming state is entered, This is a final special-character-variation display game in which the final special-character variation display game in which the lottery in the first or second specific gaming state is performed is being executed and in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed.

  If it is not the final change (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. If it is the final change (step Y 778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 779), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y 780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y781), and the left hitting instruction notifying flag and the final change flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed command notification flag, a left-handed command notification command is set in the special processing 1 special processing to be performed next time, and a notification to instruct a left-handed command is performed. Although the left-handed command notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final change, it may also be performed in the case of the second final change.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y 785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y 786), and it is determined whether it is the first specific gaming state (step Y 787).

  If it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y 787; N), the signal regarding the left-handed indication is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 788). Here, it is set to turn off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, the number in the left strike state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y 789). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing a left hit is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y 787; Y), the signal regarding the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 790). Here, it is set to turn on the launch position designation signal 1. Then, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (step Y791). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right-handed is displayed.

  After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (step Y792). If it is a small hit that opens the upper winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y 793), the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y 794), and the process proceeds to step Y 797. Also, if it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y 792; N), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the lower large winning opening illegal prize A number area is cleared (step Y795), a fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended.

  If it is determined in step Y 777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y 777; N), it is determined whether it is a final change (step Y 798). The final fluctuation here also includes both the first final fluctuation and the second final fluctuation. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the last special-image variation display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed.

  If it is not the final change (step Y798; N), the process moves to step Y806. If it is the final change (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y801), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the final change flag are cleared (step Y802). Although the left-handed command notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final change, it may also be performed in the case of the second final change.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game 2 is in the special hit state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game, ie, during the small hit in the special figure 2 (step Y 803). When it is in the small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y803; Y), it transfers to step Y806. Thus, the state of instructing to hit the right is maintained. If the special figure 2 is not in the small hit (step Y 803; N), save the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y 804), and left hitting in the gaming state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y 805). Thereafter, clear the special figure 1 fluctuation of the special figure status area (information subtraction) (step Y 806), perform special process transition setting processing 1 for special figure 1 (step Y 807), and end the special figure 1 display processing. .

[Process during special figure 2 display]
FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 show the special figure 2 in-display process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the process of displaying the special view 2, the same process as the process of displaying the special view 1 described above is performed for the special view 2. In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), the small hit flag Clear the two areas (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y 815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y 815; N), it proceeds to step Y 837. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y 815; Y), the test signal (for example, to turn on the condition device operating signal, the feature continuous operation device operating the special equipment 2 variation display game big hit (special image 2 large hit) start The medium signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y 817), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y 818). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the number-of-rounds upper limit table is set (step Y 819), and the number-of-rounds upper limit (12, 5 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information is acquired Save (step Y820). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the special drawing 2 stop design pattern is hit and prepared from the design command area (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of becoming a big hit in the special view variable display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, clear the probability variation operation area passing information area (step Y 829), clear the upper large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area (step Y 830), save the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (Step Y831). Further, the lower large winning a prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y 832), the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y 833), and the processing proceeds to step Y834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834), and the special figure 2 game process number area is saved (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process (step Y 836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y 815; N) at step Y 815, that is, if the big hit flag 2 is out information, it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). Then, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y 837; Y), it is determined whether it is the final change (step Y 838). The final fluctuation here includes both the first final fluctuation and the second final fluctuation. That is, during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) after the first special gaming state is ended and the first or second specific gaming state is entered, This is a final special-character-variation display game in which the final special-character variation display game in which the lottery in the first or second specific gaming state is performed is being executed and in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed.

  If it is not the final change (step Y 838; N), the process proceeds to step Y 843. If it is the final change (step Y 838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 839), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y 840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y841), and the left hitting instruction notifying flag and the final change flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed command notification flag, a left-handed command notification command is set in the special processing 1 special processing to be performed next time, and a notification to instruct a left-handed command is performed. Although the left-handed command notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final change, it may also be performed in the case of the second final change.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether it is the first specific gaming state (step Y847).

  If it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y 847; N), the signal regarding the left-handed indication is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 848). Here, it is set to turn off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, the number in the left strike state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing a left hit is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y 847; Y), the signal regarding the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 850). Here, it is set to turn on the launch position designation signal 1. Then, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (step Y 851). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right-handed is displayed.

  After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit that opens the upper winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Also, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y 852; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the lower large winning opening illegal prize A number area is cleared (step Y 855), a fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y 856), and the process proceeds to step Y 857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is ended.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is determined whether it is the final change (step Y858). The final fluctuation here also includes both the first final fluctuation and the second final fluctuation. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the last special-image variation display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed. Then, if it is not the final change (step Y 858; N), the process proceeds to step Y 866. If it is the final change (step Y 858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 859), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y 860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y861), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the final change flag are cleared (step Y862). Although the left-handed command notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final change, it may also be performed in the case of the second final change.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a special hit of the special figure 1 is in progress, that is, a second special gaming state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y863). If it is in the middle of the special figure 1 (step Y863; Y), it moves to step Y866. Thus, the state of instructing to hit the right is maintained. If the special figure 1 is not in the small hit (step Y863; N), save the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and in the game state display number 2 area Save the number (step Y865). After that, clear the special figure 2 fluctuation of the special figure status area (information subtraction) (step Y866), do special figure 2 usual processing transition setting processing 1 (step Y867), finish the special figure 2 display processing .

  That is, a first special game is generated in which the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variation winning device is opened with operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variation display game. Second special game generation means for generating a second special game state for opening the special fluctuation winning device without activating the condition device based on the generation means and based on the second special result of the variable display game. I

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
In FIG. 74, the details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) in the processing of displaying the special drawing 1 and the processing of displaying the special drawing 2 described above will be described. In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process, first, a signal regarding the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y 871). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (the state of reduced variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF.

  Thereafter, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y 873), and the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y 874). The special figure low probability and time saving none flags are saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special view fluctuation display executable in the high probability state The high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the low probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Next, the information on the big hit is saved in the special view status area (step Y878), and the final change flag area is cleared (step Y879). Although either the first final fluctuation flag or the second final fluctuation flag is set in the final fluctuation flag area, it is cleared regardless of which is set. Further, the signal regarding the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y 881).

  Thereafter, the cancellation flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y 882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y 883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step Y 884), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y 885), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process is ended. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, clear all the information about the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process]
FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 797) in the special figure 1 display process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, first, "7" concerning small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the process number is set as the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y 892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit medium information is saved in the special view status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special view small hit fanfare medium process transition setting processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 857) in the special figure 2 display process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, first, "7" concerning small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set as the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit medium information is saved in the special view status information (step Y 906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y 907), and the special view 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process is ended. Do.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 77 shows fanfare / in-interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and a round command corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y952). (Step Y953).

  Next, a big hit middle processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y 954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y 955). As the jackpot processing control pointer initial value, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, upper V release corresponds. In addition, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, 2 which is the big hit operation end value is set. Note that the initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The open time set here is, for example, either 200 ms or 25000 ms.

  Next, it is judged whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y 958), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y 958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y 959) ), The special winning opening open time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y 958; N), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y 961) and save the special winning opening open time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether it is a round of opening the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y963). If it is a round for opening the upper large winning a prize opening (step Y963; Y), the special winning opening opening processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval in progress processing is ended. Further, if it is not a round for opening the upper prize winning opening (step Y963; N), the process setting setting processing during the opening of the special winning opening is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval in progress processing is ended.

[In process opening setting process 1 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 78 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step Y 964) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the opening start of the upper large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening on data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the open / close door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 (step Y972), and the number of winnings for the special winning opening is counted. Clear the special winning opening count (step Y 973)

  Next, it is determined whether it is an operation round of the lever solenoid (step Y 974). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i, and in the case of this embodiment, it is only a specific round of the first round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y 974; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y 975), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. Thus, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y 974; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y 976), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated. In the present embodiment, this process is not performed because there is no case where the first special variation winning device 38 is opened except for the lever solenoid operation round.

[In process opening setting process 2 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 79 shows the processing setting process transition setting process 2 (step Y965) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the opening start of the lower large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower special winning opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 (step Y982), and the number of winnings for the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y 983), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 2 is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 80 shows the special winning opening open process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this big winning opening open processing, first, the big hit medium processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether the loaded value is greater than the big hit operation end value (here 2) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not greater than the big hit operation end value (2 here) (step Y1002; N), perform the big hit operation shift setting process (step Y1003) and update the big hit middle process control pointer by 1 (step Y1004) , The special winning opening open processing ends. In this case, the opening and closing is performed in one round, and the opening and closing mode of the special variation winning device is set according to the updated big hit and middle processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (here, 2) (step Y1002; Y), the current number of rounds and the number of rounds upper limit of the round number upper limit area in the special gaming state being executed are To determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). Then, if it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. Also, if it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), prepare an ending command relating to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state (step Y1007), effect command setting processing (step Y1008) I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 for the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). As residual ball processing time, 1300 ms or 1700 ms is set. And it is determined whether it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012) and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012) Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014) and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening open processing is ended. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and the process for closing any large winning opening is performed.

[Big hit operation shift setting processing]
FIG. 81 shows the big hit operation shift setting process (step Y1004) in the above-mentioned process for opening the big winning opening. In this big hit operation shift setting processing, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit / middle processing control pointer is even or odd (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed assuming that 0 is an even number.

  If it is determined in step Y1021 that the value of the big hit middle process control pointer is even, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 2700 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process moves to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and processing for closing any large winning opening is performed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is odd in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, 25000 ms is set as the big winning opening opening time when the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is 1. Next, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process shifts to step Y1026. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, only the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, so the step Y 1024 saves on data for the upper large winning opening solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the opening and closing of the lower large winning opening (the second special variation winning device 39) may be repeated in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), the big hit operation shift setting processing ends. If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit operation shift setting process is ended. The above processing makes it possible to repeat the opening and closing of the special winning opening in one round.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special winning hole remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the special drawing 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing described above. In this special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round (Step Y1041).

  Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal regarding the end of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and 3 for fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the remaining ball processing time, and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the interval time. For example, since the remaining ball processing time of 1700 ms and the interval time of 300 ms are set for the lower long release, the interval period is 2000 ms, and the interval effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like during this interval period.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the big hit end processing shift setting processing is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), 6 is set as the processing number according to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y 1047).

  And it is determined whether it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), save the set time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 1050), finish the special winning opening remaining ball processing. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step Y1052), finish the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

  The ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the last round to the passage of the remaining ball processing time, and the period from the passage of the remaining ball processing time to the ending time. For example, in the case of the lower long opening, since the remaining ball processing time of 1700 ms and the ending time of 2300 ms are set, the ending period is 4000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 83 shows the big hit end processing shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, a signal related to the open end of the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step Y1072), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step Y1073) ), Clears the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step Y1074).

  Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step Y1075), and of the special winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information on the big hit middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end processing shift setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 84 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether there is the probability variation operation area passing information set when the gaming ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h (step Y1101). When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step Y1101; N), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step Y1102), and the process proceeds to step Y1104. In this case, the game is not in the high probability state but in the normal gaming state. When there is the probability variation operation area passing information (step Y1101; Y), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step Y1103), and the process proceeds to step Y1104. In this case, the high probability state and the short time state are brought about and the first specified gaming state is reached. That is, in the special view 1 variation display game, regardless of the jackpot symbol or the game state, when the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h, the first specific game state is established.

  Next, "0" is set as a process number relating to the special figure 1 routine process (step Y1104), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1105). Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1106). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Thereafter, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the condition device operating signal, the character continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1108), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1109). A flag is saved in the area during the fraud monitoring period (step Y1110), and the special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1111). It should be noted that, by clearing the special view status area, the special view status 0 indicates that neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed. Thereafter, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1112), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

  The special view variation display game can be started for any of the special view 1 and the special view 2 by performing the special view 1 big hit end process, but in the timer interrupt process, the special view 2 game is performed after the special view 1 game process. In order to perform processing, processing to start the special view variation display game is performed in the special view 2 game processing with the timer interrupt which has performed special view 1 big hit end processing, and the special view 2 variation display game is performed than the special view 1 variation display game Will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1112, the start process for the special figure 2 variation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, The variable display game and the special view 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

  In other words, the second variable display game execution control unit continues the process until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. (2) A game processing standby means is provided to prevent the processing relating to the start of the variable display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 85 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In the special view 2 big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether there is the probability variation operation area passing information set when the gaming ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h (step Y1121). When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step Y1121; N), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step Y1125), and the process proceeds to step Y1126. In this case, the game is not in the high probability state but in the normal gaming state. Further, when there is the probability variation operation area passing information (step Y1121; Y), it is determined whether it is a hit in the special view 2 variation display game started in the first specific gaming state (step Y1122).

  If it is a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific gaming state (step Y1122; Y), that is, if it is a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is a main change special game, A big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step Y1124), and the process moves to step Y1126. In this case, the high probability state and the short time state are brought about and the first specified gaming state is reached. Also, if it is not a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific gaming state (step Y1122; N), that is, if it is a hit when the special figure 2 variable display game is not a main variation special figure, A big hit end setting process 3 is performed (step Y1123), and the process moves to step Y1126. In this case, it is a high probability state, but it is not a time saving state but a second specific gaming state. That is, regardless of the jackpot symbol, the game ball is in a high probability state when the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h, but if it is a hit in the main fluctuation special figure, it becomes a short time state and a hit in the main fluctuation special figure For example, it is designed not to be short-lived.

  Next, “0” is set as the process number relating to the special figure 2 routine process (step Y1126), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1127). Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1128). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Thereafter, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1129). Here, the condition device operating signal, the character continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF.

  Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and A flag is saved in the area during the fraud monitoring period (step Y1132), the special view status area is cleared (step Y1133), and the special view 2 big hit end process is ended. It should be noted that, by clearing the special view status area, the special view status 0 indicates that neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 86 shows the big hit end setting process 1 (steps Y1103 and 1124) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (the state of reduced variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1141). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is to be continued.

  Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1142). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal are set to ON. Thereafter, save the high probability and the short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1143), and set the initial value in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state (here Then save 100) (step Y1144).

  Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1145), and the signal regarding the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1146). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Thereafter, save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1147), save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1148), and set the big hit end Finish 1 By this processing, the high probability state and the short time state are achieved, and the first specific gaming state is achieved.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 87 shows the big hit end setting process 2 (steps Y1102 and 1125) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the start of the low probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF.

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal are set to OFF. Thereafter, the low probability and time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153).

  Next, the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1154), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Thereafter, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1156), save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1157), and set the big hit end Finish 2 By this processing, the low probability state and no time saving are made, and the normal gaming state is established.

[Big hit end setting processing 3]
FIG. 88 shows the big hit end setting process 3 (step Y1123) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the big hit end setting process 3, first, a signal regarding the start of the high probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is to be continued.

  Next, a signal related to the start of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to ON, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal are set to OFF. Thereafter, save the high probability and time saving none flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1163), and set the initial value in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in the high probability state ( Here, 100) is saved (step Y 1164).

  Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1165), and the signal relating to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1166). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Thereafter, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1167), save the probability information command (high probability) in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1168), and set the big hit end Exit 3 By this processing, the high probability state and no time saving are made, and the second specified gaming state is established.

  By the above processing, it is possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state until 100 special game variation display games are executed after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the game control apparatus 100 has a probability of the result of the variable display game becoming a special result for a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state. I Further, the specific gaming state generation means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result over the predetermined period as the specific gaming state, as compared to the normal state.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit fanfare medium process, first, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1201).

  If the release pattern is small hit 1 in step Y1201, prepare a small hit open command for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) (step Y1202), and perform effect command setting processing (step Step Y1203). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 1 (here, 48 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  Also, if the opening pattern is small hit 2 at step Y1201, prepare a small hit open command for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) (step Y1209), and set the effect command setting process. Perform (step Y1210). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  Also, if the opening pattern is small hit 3 in step Y1201, prepare a small hit open command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y1216), and set the effect command setting process. Perform (step Y1217). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  Also, if the opening pattern is small hit 4 in step Y1201, prepare a small hit open command for opening the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (step Y1223), and execute the effect command setting process. Perform (step Y1224). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1225), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 4 (1600 ms here) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process shifts to step Y1230. After processing according to these small hit types, the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare middle processing is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
FIG. 90 shows small hit middle processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. In the small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

  If the open pattern is small hit 1 in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1244), and save the processing number in the special view 1 game processing number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit residual ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247), End processing during hit.

  If the open pattern is small hit 2 in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1248), and save the processing number in the special view 2 game processing number area (step Y1249). The small hit residual ball processing time 2 (here 600 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251), End processing during hit.

  If the open pattern is small hit 3 or 4 in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1252), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y1253). Then, small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255), small End processing during hit.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251 and Y1255, the off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and processing for closing any large winning opening is performed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 91 shows small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the special drawing 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing described above. In this small hit residual ball processing, first, it is judged whether it is a small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), set 10 for the special figure 1 small hit end process as the process number (step Y1272), and set the process number to the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here 100 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process goes to step Y1278.

  If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), set 10 for the special figure 2 small hit process as the process number (step Y1275), and set the process number to the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process goes to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y 1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 92 shows the special figure 1 small hitting end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 for the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1306). By clearing the special view status area, special view status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed is obtained.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y1307), and if it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y1307; Y), it proceeds to step Y1310. Further, when it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y1307; N), a signal relating to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, save the number in the left hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), save the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310) ), Special figure 1 small hit end processing ends. Here too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game The special figure 2 variation display game is processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 93 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set for the special figure 2 normal process as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special view status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special view status area, special view status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed is obtained.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y1338), and when it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended. Further, when it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y1338; N), a signal relating to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 94 shows symbol variation control processing (steps Y120 and Y153) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is varying (step Y1401).

  And, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol of the control object is acquired (step Y1403), the blinking control timer concerning the symbol of the control object Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the blink control timer initial value (100 ms here) is saved in the blink control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), and the symbol to be controlled is displayed. The variation symbol number according to is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area of interest is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the change control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is ended. As a result, a special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special view display to be controlled among the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 95 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, a round display displaying the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing of the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39) provided in the collective display device 50. Part 60, the first gaming state display part 77 to inform the player of the hitting which is advantageous among the left hitting (normal hitting) and the right hitting, the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game The setting regarding the drive of the segment LED which comprises the probability display part 78 to alert | report etc. is performed.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, the special figure 1 pending number table in which the display mode in the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number is acquired Save to the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 60 is defined is set (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step X604).

  Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode in the probability display unit 78 is defined is set (step X605), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). Thereafter, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode in the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), end the segment LED editing process.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 96 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start or the end of fraud notification is set.

  In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnetic sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on from the state of the detection signal which is output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), that is, abnormal magnetism It is determined whether it is in the state of detecting (step X611). If the magnetic sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has timed up. It determines (step X613).

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a command of magnet informing notification is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618). If the magnet fraud alerting timer that defines f is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (step X620). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step X613; N), the processing also proceeds to step X619.

  Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. In addition, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, the fraud alert period is over or the fraud alert is from the beginning. If it is not performed, a command for magnet informing end is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

  Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), rendering command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is ended. Do.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 97 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  In this board radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor 62 is output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and from the state of the detection signal taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). If the board radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud alert timer initial value (60000 ms in this case) is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step X632).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step X633), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X634), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave cheating, unlike in the case of magnetic cheating, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not 0 and -1 is updated ( Step X 635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is 0 (step X 636; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing is over, or the injustice is notified from the beginning. If not done, prepare a command of the end of board radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is a board radio wave It is determined whether the value of the incorrect flag area matches the value (step X639).

  Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), effect command setting processing is performed (step X641), and board radio wave fraud monitoring End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 98 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, the monitoring result in payout command transmission process (step X105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. On the basis of the above, the information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main frame (front frame 12) ) It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the main frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is external information The file is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step X 701; Y) or when the body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X 702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, the information in which the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as the external information.

  Next, the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch, etc. ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  Then, if the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710). Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. In addition, if the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X 708; Y), is it during occurrence of frame radio wave irregularity that is detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12? Is determined (step X709).

  If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch is occurring (step X711). When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  Then, during a magnet fraud (step X713; Y), during a board radio wave fraud (step X714; Y), during a special winning opening fraud (step X715; Y), during special feature 2 abnormal fluctuation (step X716; Y) If the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X 718) and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X719), Go to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  The starting opening 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning opening 37 Do. Next, main prize ball signal editing processing (step X 722) is performed to set information on the scheduled number of prize balls to be paid out, and symbol determination number signal editing processing is performed to set information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game. Then (step X723), the external information editing process is ended.

[Starting opening 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 99 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. In this starting opening 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening 1 signal output is 0 (step X733).

  Then, if the start opening 1 signal output number is not 0 (step X733; N), the start opening 1 signal output number is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start opening 1 signal output is made in the start opening 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The start opening 1 signal output control timer initial value is the time obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the start port signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the starting opening 1 signal editing process is ended. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM (step X738) ), The start opening 1 signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start 1 port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). The fact that the start opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. If the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), save the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X738), the start opening 1 signal editing process is ended. The starting opening 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the above-mentioned external information editing process performs the same processing as the starting opening 1 signal editing process for the starting opening 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 100 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning to the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10) to the external device It is a process.

  In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output number is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by 1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X745). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the main prize ball signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X 748), The main prize ball signal editing process is finished.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is finished.

[Pattern fixed number signal editing process]
FIG. 101 shows the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step X723) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling an output time of information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). If the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X 752; Y), it is determined whether the number of symbol determination frequency signal outputs, which is incremented by +1 every time the special view variation display game is 0, is 0 (Step X753).

  Then, when the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal output is in the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X755). This symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value added the time of the on state (for example, high level) of the symbol determination frequency signal (here, 256 ms) and the time of off state (for example, low level) (here, 300 ms) It is time (in this case 556 ms). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game can be executed simultaneously, so the on state time is 256 ms and the off state time is 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is ended. When the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0 (step X753; Y), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X758) The symbol determination number signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is ended.

[Probability change operation area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the probability change operation area switch monitoring process (step X116) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, in the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area 38h is active (step X801). The fact that the probability variation operation area 38h is active means that the detection of the gaming ball with the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 7). If the positive variation actuation area 38h is not active (step X801; N), the positive variation operation area switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, if the probability variation operation area 38h is valid (step X801; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch (step X802).

  Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch (step X802; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process is ended. If the probability change operation area switch has an input (step X802; Y), a probability change operation area passing command is prepared (step X803), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X804). As a result, in the effect control device 300, effects corresponding to the game balls having flowed into the probability variation operation area 38h can be executed. Thereafter, the probability variation operation region passage information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step X805), and the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process is ended.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Next, details of the lever solenoid control process (step X117) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the lever solenoid control process, it is determined first whether the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (here, -1) (step X821). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (step X821; Y), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no update code (step X821; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step X822), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step X823) .

  If the lever solenoid control timer has not become 0 (step X823; N), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step X823; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step X824), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step X825). Then, the control pointer of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step X827), and the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step X828). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step X829), and the lever solenoid control process is ended.

  By the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated each time a predetermined time elapses, and as shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, ON and OFF of the lever solenoid 38f are set, and the positive change operation area The switch 38d is set to be valid or invalid. When the operation of the lever solenoid is ended by satisfying a predetermined condition, by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated. Then, after 0 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

  In the above embodiments, the special machine 1 variable display game and the special machine 2 variable display game have been described to be executed simultaneously, but the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed simultaneously It may be a gaming machine. In this case, one of the special figure variation display games may be executed with priority, or the special figure variation display game may be executed in the order of winning on the start winning hole. In addition, although it was possible to select which of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 to aim at by the player's intention by adjusting the launch force, it is possible to aim for both start winning openings at the same time You may

  Further, although the high probability state is generated based on the game balls flowing into the probability change operation area 38h, it may be determined whether or not to be the high probability state only by the type of the special result. In addition, the game value to be granted is made different depending on whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation special figure, but it is also given according to whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation special figure The game value to be played may be made different. The game value to be changed is not limited to the presence or absence of the time saving state. For example, the number of rounds in the special gaming state or the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 may be made different. In addition, the ease of inflow of gaming balls into the probability variation operation area 38h may be made different. Also, the number of games to be in the time saving state may be made different. In addition to this, whether or not to execute a specific video, audio or the like may be differentiated as a game value in effect. Furthermore, these combinations may be used.

  Not only the main variation special figure but also other conditions may be taken into consideration to determine the game value to be given. For example, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not a main variation special figure and is a big hit, if the type of special result is a probability variation hit, the gaming ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h and a high probability state However, if the type of the special result is a normal hit, it may be set to a high probability state and a short time state when the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38 h if the special result type is a normal hit. When the special figure 1 variation display game is a main variation special figure and the game is a big hit, when the gaming ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h, the high probability state and the short time state are set. That is, it is sufficient if at least determination of the game value to be granted whether or not it is a hit in the main variation special figure is involved.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game is not the main fluctuation special figure, when it becomes big hit and the game ball flows into the probability change operation territory 38h, it decides to move to 2nd specified game state ST3, but 1st specified game state ST2 In a predetermined period after ending and shifting to the normal gaming state ST1, the first specific gaming state ST2 when a big hit occurs in the special view 2 variation display game which is not the main variation special view and the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h You may make it shift. The predetermined period may be from the start of the normal gaming state ST1 to the execution of the predetermined number of games, or may be until the predetermined time has elapsed. By doing this, the special figure fluctuation executed based on the game ball that has already been fired in the right direction despite having returned the launch direction to the left, winning in the second start winning opening 37 It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged when the special result is derived in the display game. In this case, the player has fired unintentionally, and by making it possible to shift to the first specific gaming state ST1, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing a game from having dissatisfaction.

  Also, conversely, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is not the main fluctuation special drawing during this predetermined period and the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h, it shifts to the second specified gaming state ST3. If a special result is derived in a special figure 2 variation display game which is not a main variation special figure except for a predetermined period and the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h, the game may shift to the first specific gaming state ST2. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming more advantageous than the one assumed in the design of the gaming machine.

  Further, although the main variation special figure is determined in all the game states, the main variation special figure may be defined only in a part of the game states. When a special result is derived in the gaming state in which the main variation special figure is not determined and the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h, one of the first specified gaming state ST2 and the second specified gaming state ST3 is determined in advance It is also possible to shift to another, or to decide which one to shift to depending on the type of special result or a separate lottery.

  In addition, the game value to be awarded is higher in the case of the main variation special figure than in the case of the non-main variation special figure, but on the contrary, in the case of the main variation special figure. The game value to be awarded may be lower than the hit when the main variation is not a special figure. That is, since the frequency of occurrence of hit when it is not the main variation special figure is low and it is difficult to generate it, the gaming value to be given in the case of such a rare hit may be increased. Also, when the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h in a normal hit, it is similarly lower in frequency than the case where the game balls flow into the probability change operation area 38h in a probability change, so the game value to be awarded is given. You may make it high.

  Further, as the third specific gaming state, a state (with time reduction) may be provided in which the winning probability is a low probability state and the variation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened. The effect mode defining the effect mode of the game state can be distinguished from other game states as a time-saving mode. Further, the main variation special view is a special view 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the aiming direction is left hitting in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. In the case of transition to the third specific gaming state, for example, in the example of FIG. 8, it is assumed that the jackpot in the first specific gaming state ST2 has become a big hit but there is no V passage.

  In addition, conditions for shifting in more detail may be set, for example, in the first specific gaming state ST2, when it has been a big hit in the special figure 1 variation display game that is not the main variation special figure but the V is not passed It may be made to shift to 3 specific game state. Or, in the first specific game state ST2, if it is a definite change big hit (12R positive change or 5R positive change) in the special view 1 variable display game which is not the main change special view but it is not V passing, it shifts to the third specific game state You may do so. In such a case, if it is a big hit in the special figure 2 variation display game which is the main variation special figure but there is no V passage, it is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1, and the hit in the main variation special figure The game value to be granted may be made different depending on whether or not it is. In this case, the game value to be awarded in the case of the main variation special figure is lower than that in the case of the non-main variation special figure.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game is executed in special game state ST1 and it becomes special result, 1st specific game state other than the case where the player intentionally aims execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game The game ball which has been fired to the right game area in the period until it returns to the left hit when it shifts to the normal game state ST1 by the end of ST2 is special figure 2 fluctuation indicator by winning in the second start winning opening 37 There may be unintended execution by the player as the game is executed. Although the above-described embodiment does not distinguish between these cases, the game values to be separately imparted may be made different.

  For example, when a special result is derived and V passes in the special view 2 variation display game executed based on the winning of the second start winning opening 37 generated in a predetermined period from the end of the first specific gaming state ST2, The first specific game state ST2 may be shifted to the second specific game state ST3 instead of the second specific game state ST3. In addition to the predetermined period from the end of the first specific gaming state ST2, it may be a special view 2 variation display game from the end of the first specific gaming state ST2 to a predetermined number of times.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening provided in the game area 32, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that can be awarded, the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and the game ball is awarded to the first starting winning opening 36. Based on the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as the variable display game and the second as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 And second variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the variation display game, and one variation display game of the first variation display game and the second variation display game according to the gaming state. When the result of the variable display game is a special result for one or both of the first and second variable display games, which is configured to be determined as a main variable display game, the change It is possible to make the game value given to the player different depending on whether or not the display game is the main variable display game. Therefore, the game can be performed in accordance with the design of the gaming machine.

  The presentation control means (the presentation control apparatus 300) for controlling the presentation of the game is provided, and the presentation control means is configured to select one of the presentation modes from a plurality of presentation modes different in the presentation of the game, and the result of the variable display game If the game result given to the player is different depending on whether or not the variable display game is the main variable display game when the special result is a special result, different effect modes according to the provided game value Can be set. Further, different effect modes can be set in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the given gaming value.

  In addition, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are disposed at different positions, and the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are adjusted by the launch force of the game ball, thereby the first starting winning opening It is arranged in the game area 32 so that it is possible to select the state of aiming for winning in the second prize and the state of aiming for winning in the second start winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to execute the main variable display game according to the player's intention.

  Also, the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and when one of the variable display games is being executed, the result of the other variable display game becomes a special result. One of the variable display games is ended with the result of disconnection.

  In the case where the result of the variable display game is a special result for one or both of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, the variable display game is the main variable display game In the case where it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and the variable display game is not the main variable display game, after the end of the special gaming state, the game than the first specific gaming state It is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state where the gaming value given to the player is low. Therefore, the game can be performed in accordance with the design of the gaming machine.

  In addition, it is possible to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening provided in the game area 32, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, it is possible to give the player game value. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state, in the special gaming state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball can not win a prize and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize The first variation winning device (first variation variation winning device 38) having a range (probability variation actuation region 38h), and the first starting variation aperture 36 and the second starting variation aperture 37 as a start winning aperture, First variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the game to the second start winning opening 37 Based on the ball's winnings And second variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the second variation display game as the movement display game, and based on the game ball winning in the special variation winning device flowing into the specific area A game state more advantageous to the player than in the case where the game ball has not flowed into the specific area can be generated after the end of the special game state, and depending on the game state, the first variation display game and the second variation display One variable display game of the games is configured to be defined as a main variable display game, and the result of the variable display game is special for one or both of the first and second variable display games. When it comes to a result, it is possible to make the gaming value given to the player different depending on whether or not the variable display game is a main variable display game. That. Therefore, the game can be performed in accordance with the design of the gaming machine.

  In addition, it is possible to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening provided in the game area 32, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, it is possible to give the player game value. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state, the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 are provided as a start winning opening, and the variable display is based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening 36 The first variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as a game, and the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 A second variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the game, and, depending on the game state, one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is mainly used When When a special result is derived in the main variable display game in the game state when the main variable display game shifts to a predetermined predetermined game state. Is able to shift to the first specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and when the special result is derived in the non-mainly variation display game in the gaming state, the first specific after the special gaming state ends It is possible to shift to the second specified gaming state in which the gaming value given to the player is lower than the gaming state. Therefore, the game can be performed in accordance with the design of the gaming machine.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 104 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 104, in the main processing, first, processing at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18) A movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 105 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 106 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

  The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) that has not been executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to a predetermined degree of reliability, to perform the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Variable system command processing]
FIG. 107 shows variable system command processing (step C236) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special view type is undetermined (step C361). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If the special view type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

  If the variation command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, an off symbol, 12R positive variation big hit symbols, 5R positive variation big hit symbols, 2R positive variation big hit symbols, 12R normal big hit symbols, small hit symbols and the like. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is performed as if the symbol command of the 12R probability variation big hit symbol was received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received. It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts with.

  In the process of determining the change pattern type from the change command (step C364), the change pattern type which is a rough classification of the change display effect of the special view is determined according to the received command. And the fluctuation production setting processing which sets up the information in order to do the production which responds to the fluctuation command is done (step C365).

  Next, the special figure variation is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Further, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) (step C367), and the variation system command processing is ended.

[Change production setting process]
FIG. 108 shows the fluctuation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process. In this variation production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a no reach variation (step C381). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C381; Y), the model code, the special figure type, and the first-half advance notice group address table corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set (step C382). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time saving mode, a latency mode and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game on the display device 41 are made different.

  Next, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of holdings of MODE, special view type is acquired with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C383). Thus, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the first half of the previous day sorting group table is used to draw a lottery for the first half appearing in the first half (step C386).

  On the other hand, if the change pattern type is not reach-less change (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half advance distribution group address table, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half change is in progress using the first half advance distribution group table Perform a lottery for notice to appear in the (step C 386).

  Next, a lottery is made for the second half of the change. In addition, with the second half change of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game fluctuation indication with the so-called reach action (for example, the special result feature (combination of the special design) where the display territory excluding the specific territory becomes large hitting among the display territory of the special figure) Is stopped, and it is a variable display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, the second half of the previous day distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special drawing type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half prior distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half previous distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired by referring to the second half of day prior sorting distribution group address table (step C 388), and the second half is fluctuating (reaching) using the second half day of sorting distribution group table A lottery for appearing notices is made (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the fluctuation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are determined. In addition, the contents of a basic effect, a specific effect, and a common effect to be described later will also be determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing is performed to determine a stop symbol with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special view change display game and the advance notice content (step C392).

  Next, display setting of the fluctuation effect is performed (step C393), and display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special view type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decoration start storage display corresponding to the reduction of the start storage corresponding to the start of the special view variation display game.

  Then, the tone number which is the BGM number, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc. is set (step C396), and the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special drawing type (variation display of identification information) Display setting is performed (step C397). Furthermore, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decoration special view variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special view type is performed (step C398) , And finish the variation production setting process.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 109 shows the one-shot system command processing in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on a model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite internal information into model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single-shot system command processing Finish.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model specification command (step C261; N), whether it corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. It determines (step C263). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, scenario data for initializing the RAM is set in order to perform an effect when the initialization of the RAM is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying a power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to provide an effect upon power failure recovery.

  If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demo command indicating the start of a customer waiting demo Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C 267; Y), the customer waiting demonstration process is performed (step C 268), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform customer waiting effects.

  If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special view 1 suspension (step C269). And, when MODE is special figure 1 retention (step C269; Y), special figure 1 retention information setting processing which performs processing etc which displays the decoration starting memory indication which corresponds to the retention which it occurs on display unit 41 is done (Step C270), the one-shot command processing ends. When it is determined in step C269 that MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is special figure 2 suspension (step C271). Then, when MODE is the special view 2 hold (step C271; Y), the special view 2 hold information setting process is performed to execute the process corresponding to the hold that has occurred (step C272), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. Do. That is, the effect control device 300 is a start storage display means for performing start storage notification display for displaying information on the start storage by the start storage display (decorative start storage display) corresponding to each start storage.

  In addition, if MODE is not the special view 2 hold at step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error / illegal (step C275). Then, if MODE is error / illegal (step C 275; Y), error / illegal setting processing is performed to perform corresponding processing such as error notification (step C 276), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the error / incorrect setting process (step C276), a process of notifying when a command relating to an error or an error is received, a process of displaying a warning when receiving a right-handed command notification command or a left-handed command notification command, etc. are performed. .

  If MODE is not error / illegal in step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). Then, when MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing processing of switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  If MODE is not effect mode switching in step C277 (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is symbol stop (step C279). Then, when MODE is not symbol stop (step C279; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a target for the special figure currently changing.

  Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special view is made (step C281), and if all symbols have stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (step C282) End one-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special game variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as during fluctuation, during a big hit, during a small hit, etc., and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

  Next, the display mode on the display device 41 will be described. FIG. 110 (a) shows the display in the first specific gaming state ST2. In the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, a gaming state display 81 for displaying the current gaming state is displayed. Here, a small hit RUSH mode which is the name of the first specific gaming state ST2 is displayed. Further, at the upper right portion of the display area, a launch direction indication display 82 for indicating a launch direction is displayed. In the launch direction indication display 82, the launch direction is indicated by the direction of the arrow and characters. Further, at the upper left portion of the display area and below the gaming state display 81, a remaining number display 83 for displaying the number of remaining times of the special figure variation display game executable in the current gaming state is displayed.

  Further, at the center of the display area, a suggestion effect display 84 which is an effect that suggests the result of the special view variation display game in progress is displayed. This suggestion effect display 84 is adapted to suggest the result of the special view variation display game by the action of the character 84a and the dialogue 84b. In addition, the direction in which the character 84a of the suggestion effect display 84 runs is the same as the direction of the emission (here, the right direction). Further, on the center right side of the display area, an expectation degree display 86 showing an expectation degree at which the special figure fluctuation display game being executed becomes a big hit is displayed. In the expectation degree display 86, a plurality of areas are vertically arranged, and the expectation degree is indicated by the number of areas in which the display color changes sequentially from the lower area and the display color changes. Note that the suggested effect display 84 and the expected degree display 86 may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only when necessary, such as when performing an effect.

  Further, at the center right side of the display area and below the expectation display 86, an operation promotion display 87 for prompting the user to operate the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is displayed. The operation promotion display 87 is displayed in a period in which the operation can be performed in the operation reflection effect in which the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is reflected in the effect, and prompts the player to perform the operation. Further, at the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, an ornament special game variation display game display unit 85 for displaying an ornament special game variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is provided. Here, the decorative feature variation display game is displayed by variably displaying identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then displaying the identification information in a stopped state.

  FIG. 110 (b) shows the display in the second specific gaming state ST3. Compared with the case of the first specific gaming state ST2 shown in FIG. 110 (a), the display position of the firing direction indication display 82 is different, and is displayed at the top of the display area. The point of displaying the direction of emission by the direction of the arrow and the characters is the same, but the display mode such as the displayed width is different. The effect in the suggestion effect display 84 is performed by the character 84a and the dialogue 84b as in the case of the first specific gaming state ST2, but the direction in which the character 84a runs is the left direction which is the firing direction. In addition, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game indicatory department 85 which displays the decoration special figure fluctuation indicatory game, is provided in the center of the display area so as to overlap with the suggestion effect indication 84. In addition, the display mode (display method, background of display, mode of frame surrounding display, etc.) and display position of the game state display 81, remaining number display 83, expected degree display 86, and the operation promotion display 87 are the first specific game state ST2. Is the same as in

  At the lower center of the display area, a storage display unit 88 for displaying information on starting storage is provided. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, only the first start memory is stored as a start memory for suspending execution of the special figure variation display game, so the first specific game in which the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game In the state ST2, the memory display unit 88 is not displayed. The storage display unit 88 is provided with a number of display areas 88b corresponding to the upper limit number (4 in this case) of the start storage, and the display area 88b has a decorative special view start storage display 88a corresponding to the start storage one-on-one. Displayed in order of memory. Here, it is indicated that there is one starting memory. The decoration special view start memory display 88a displayed in the display area 88b at the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored first, and is shifted to the left every time it is digested There is. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to each start memory and the prefetching result such as the fluctuation pattern by the display mode.

  On the left side of the storage display unit 88, an in-execution storage display unit 89 is provided which displays information related to starting storage corresponding to the currently-executed special view variation display game. In this in-execution storage display unit 89, the decoration special drawing start storage display 88a at the left end of the storage display unit 88 is transferred at the start of the special view fluctuation display game, and the result or fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game executed. Etc. are suggested by the display mode.

  Both the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3 have a high probability of a big hit, so by making part of the display on the display device 41 common as described above, the high probability in both Unique effects can be executed in the state, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by sharing the display, it is possible to share the image and effect data and processing stored in the effect control device 300, and to reduce the burden of controlling the game.

  FIGS. 110 (c) and (d) show an example of the warning display 90 displayed when the game ball is detected to be fired in a direction different from the instructed launch direction. Although the warning display 90 is performed when the effect control device 300 receives a right-handed command notification command or a left-handed command notification command from the game control device 100, it is set in the starting opening switch monitoring process (see FIG. 36) The warning display 90 is displayed when the right-handed command notification command or the left-handed command notification command is received, and the firing direction command display 82 is received when the right-handed command notification command or the left-handed command notification command set other than this is received. To start. The identification of these commands may be made according to the situation when the effect control device 300 receives the commands, or the game control device 100 may be added with information that can identify these commands and transmitted. Also good.

  FIG. 110 (c) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the first specific gaming state ST2, and FIG. 110 (d) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the second specific gaming state ST3. In any case, the warning display 90 is displayed on the front side in the center of the display area in preference to other displays. The warning display 90 in the case of the first specific gaming state ST2 shown in FIG. 110 (c) is extended over the left and right of the display area in the same manner as the firing direction indication 82 in the second specific gaming state ST3 shown in FIG. Displayed by existing horizontal arrows. Also, the warning display 90 in the case of the second specific gaming state ST3 shown in FIG. 110 (d) is displayed by a thick arrow like the firing direction indication display 82 in the first specific gaming state ST2 shown in FIG. 110 (c) Ru.

  FIGS. 110 (e) and (f) show another example of the warning display 90. FIG. FIG. 111 (e) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the first specific gaming state ST2, and FIG. 111 (f) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the second specific gaming state ST3. In this example, the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111 (e) and the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111 (f) have different display contents. The examples shown in FIGS. 110 (c) and 110 (d) can be considered as warning displays 90 having different display modes and display contents, and the examples in FIGS. 110 (e) and 110 (f) have the same display modes. It can also be said that it is a display 90.

  Further, FIGS. 111 (a) and (b) also show another example of the warning display 90. FIG. FIG. 111 (a) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the first specific gaming state ST2, and FIG. 111 (b) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the second specific gaming state ST3. In this example, the display mode and display contents of the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111 (a) and the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111 (b) are the same.

  Also, another example of the warning display 90 is shown in FIGS. 111 (c) to (f). FIG. 111 (c) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the first specific gaming state ST2, and FIG. 111 (d) is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the second specific gaming state ST3. Also, FIG. 111 (e) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the normal gaming state ST1, and FIG. 111 (f) is a time-shortened state in which the hit probability is a low probability state and the fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game is shortened. This is an example in which the warning display 90 is displayed in the case where the third specific gaming state (time reduction mode) in which the state is (time reduction) is provided. In addition, since the third specific gaming state is short, the main variation special view is a special view 2 variation display game, and the launch direction is right-handed. In this example, the display mode and display contents of the warning display 90 shown in FIGS. 111 (c) to (f) are the same in all the game states. Note that the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 111 (a) can be used commonly in all gaming states.

  In addition, as a display displayed on the display device 41, a standby display may be performed to notify that it is in a special gaming state and in a state of waiting for the start of a new special view variable display game. When a small hit or a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game and a special gaming state occurs, a new special view variation display game can not be started until the special game state ends. In particular, when the special figure variation display game which is not the main variation special figure becomes a special result and a special gaming state occurs, the player often does not intend and the special figure variation display game which is the main variation special figure is temporary There is a possibility that the player may have a sense of distrust for becoming unstartable.

  Therefore, a standby display may be displayed to notify the player that the special view variation display game can not be started because the special gaming state is generated, so that the player does not have a sense of distrust . As such a standby display, for example, a display may be displayed to prompt the display device 41 to “wait a little”, or a display may be provided to clearly notify that a small hit has occurred. You may In addition, since it can be clearly recognized when it is a big hit, the standby display may not be performed.

  Further, whether or not standby display is to be performed may be selected according to the game state. For example, standby display is performed in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3 in which the main variation special view is a special view 1 variation display game, and no specific display is performed in the first specific gaming state ST2. In the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time is very long for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is not the main fluctuation special view, so the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started It is conceivable that the special figure 2 variable display game is forgotten to be executed. Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game has only a small hit and a big hit, if the special figure 2 unintentionally occurs due to the special figure 2 variable display game ending that the player forgets that the game is running As described above, the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the main variation special figure, is temporarily in a state where it can not be executed. In particular, since a predetermined number of start memories can be stored for the special view 1 change display game, the player may have a sense of distrust about a situation where the special view change display game can not start despite the start memory . For this reason, it is preferable that in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3, the standby display is performed to notify that the execution of the special view fluctuation display game is on standby.

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, notification of the opening time of the special variation winning device will be described. FIG. 112 shows the jackpot-based command processing (step C238) in the reception command analysis processing described above. In this big hit system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). Then, if MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare effect setting processing is performed to set the fanfare display image according to the big hit type and small hit (step C402), and the P machine status is set during fanfare. It sets (step C403) and ends big hit system command processing.

  If the MODE is not a fanfare (Step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (Step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. Then, if MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process of updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406), End the jackpot system command processing.

  If MODE is not a round (Step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (Step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. Then, when MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process is performed to set effects during the interval (step C408), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409). End system command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to ending after the final round.

  If MODE is ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process is performed to set screen information corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit ends (step C411), and the P machine state is set during the ending. (Step C412), the big hit system command processing ends. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is counting (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening count command based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38.

  If the MODE is not a count (Step C413; N), the big hit system command processing is ended. If MODE is a count (step C413; Y), count effect setting processing (step C414) is performed to set an effect corresponding to a winning on the special variation winning device 38, and the big hit system command processing is ended.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 113 (a) shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this count effect setting process, first, winning symbol information is acquired (step C501). The hit symbol information is information based on the hit symbol command transmitted from the game control device 100 at the start of the special game state, and is information on the type of hit symbol. Based on the hit symbol information, it is determined whether the special gaming state being executed is based on the probability variation big hit (step C502).

  If the special gaming state being executed is not based on the probability variation big hit (step C502; N), the count effect setting process is ended. In this case, the effect based on the winning of the special variation winning device is not performed. If the special game state being executed is based on the probability variation big hit (step C502; Y), it is determined whether it is a specific round (step C503). The specific round is a round in which gaming balls may flow into the probability change operation area 38h forming the specific area, and is the first round in this embodiment.

  If it is not the specific round (step C503; N), the count effect setting process is ended. If it is a specific round (step C503; Y), the winning counter for counting the number of winnings in the specific round is updated by +1 (step C504), and the notification time table corresponding to the winning symbol information is acquired (step C504) Step C505). Then, the notification time corresponding to the winning counter value is acquired (step C506), the acquired notification time is displayed on the acquisition time display 92 (step C507), and the count effect setting process is ended.

  FIG. 113 (b) shows an example of the notification time table. When the hit symbol is 12R positive variation, when one gaming ball is won in the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round, 1.80 seconds is selected as the notification time. Thereafter, the notification time is added by about 1.80 seconds for each of the second to eighth winnings, and the notifying time is set to 19.89 seconds by the ninth winning which is the upper limit number of winnings in a specific round. In the case of the 12R probability variation big hit, the opening mode in the 2nd to 12th rounds after the specific round is the lower shorting open, so it is an openable time of 1808ms, and the total value of the openable times in this 2nd to 12th rounds is It is 19888 ms. A part of the total value is sequentially notified for each winning in a specific round, and when winning is performed up to the upper limit value in the specific round, all the total values are notified.

  Similarly, in the case of the 5R probability variation big hit, a part of 9040 ms which is the total value of openable time is notified for each winning in a specific round, and all of the total values are notified when winning up to the upper limit in a specific round It becomes. In the case of the 2R probability variation big hit, all the possible open times are notified by the fifth winning. As described above, the entertaining time in the specific round is improved by sequentially notifying the openable time after the winning in the specific round.

  Note that the notification time table shown in FIG. 113 (b) is an example, and a notification mode other than this may be selected. For example, in the case of the 12R probability variation big hit, the first to eighth may be the same as the 5R probability variation big hit, and the ninth winning combination may be made to display 19.89 seconds. Further, even in the case of the 12R probability variation big hit, the same notification as the 5R probability variation big hit may be made, and there may be a case where not all the openable time is notified. In this case, an effect may be performed such that the time value is added at a specific timing after the second round.

  In addition, when the game ball does not win up to the upper limit number in the specific round, the acquisition time display may be vaguely displayed as "??" at the end of the specific round, or the end of the specific round or two rounds The same value as in the case where the game ball has won up to the upper limit number with the start of the eyes may be displayed. Alternatively, time values may be displayed according to the number of game balls that have won in a specific round, and effects may be performed such that the time value is added at a specific timing after the second round.

  FIG. 114 and FIG. 115 show an example of notification of the openable time. In this example, the first specific gaming state ST2 is set, and as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the same display as that shown in FIG. 110 (a) is made. Further, here, an acquired ball number display portion 91 is displayed, which displays the number of game balls acquired from the end of the normal gaming state ST1 to the next normal gaming state ST1. Here we show that we have 1250 balls.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), a special result is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a special gaming state is started. The first round of the special gaming state is a specific round, and as shown in FIG. 114 (c), an effect of the specific round is performed. In this effect, effects such that the opening time of the special fluctuation winning device is increased by the winning of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 are performed, and the game state display 81 displaying the current gaming state is displayed. While displaying as “Time stock mode”, an explanatory display that displays “Set winning and earning time !!” in the center of the display area, and an acquired time display 92 (0 seconds here) that displays acquired time To be done.

  In addition, the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85 moves to the lower left portion of the display area, and displays the derived special result. Furthermore, the display of the acquired number-of-balls display portion 91 is continued, and the number of gaming balls acquired in the special game state is also added.

  After that, when the first gaming ball wins, a time value corresponding to the type of special result and the number of winnings is added to the acquisition time display 92 as shown in FIG. 114 (d). Here, since the special result is a 12R definite variation, 1.80 seconds are added. Further, when the second game ball is won, 1.80 seconds are added to the acquisition time display 92 as shown in FIG. 114 (e), resulting in 3.60 seconds. Then, when the ninth game ball, which is the upper limit number in the specific round, wins, the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 19.89 seconds as shown in FIG. 114 (f).

  At the end of the first round, which is a specific round, and at an interval time, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the explanation display at the center of the display area becomes “during stock release”, indicating that the acquired time is released Be Next, when the second round is started and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the time of the acquisition time display 92 decreases over the open period. Since the openable time in the second round is 1808 ms, the value of the acquisition time display 92 is 18.08 seconds as shown in FIG. 115 (c) at the end of the open in the second round.

  Further, with the start of the second round in which the stock is released, the display of the special result displayed on the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85 is erased. As a result, it is possible not to be aware of being in the special gaming state, and to give an impression as if a small hit has occurred in the first specific gaming state ST2. Note that the same effect display as the effect display in the first specific game state ST2 as shown in FIG. 114 (a) from the second round may be performed.

  The third round also has an openable time of 1808 ms. As shown in FIG. 115 (c), when the opening of the third round is completed, the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 16.27 seconds. Then, at the end of opening the 12th round which is the final round, as shown in FIG. 115 (d), the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 00.00 seconds, and a display of "stock release complete" is displayed on the explanation display. The state will end. When the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h in the specific round of the special game state, it becomes the display in the first specific game state ST2 as shown in FIG. 115 (e) along with the end of the special game state. Further, when the gaming ball does not flow into the probability change operation area 38h in the specific round of the special gaming state, the display in the normal gaming state ST1 is made along with the end of the special gaming state.

  As described above, the effect in the special game state is not clearly shown to be in the special game state, but by setting it as the effect that the first specific game state ST2 is continuing, it is a novel effect and unprecedented can do. That is, in the present embodiment, a small hit frequently occurs in the first specific game state ST2, and a special game state based on the small hit occurs frequently. Whether each round is a special game state based on a small hit, by making a plurality of rounds the same operation mode and effect as the special game state based on a small hit, when it becomes a special result in such a game state You can do the production like. As a result, it can appear as if the first specific gaming state ST2 advantageous to the player is continuing for a long time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that if the interval time between rounds is equal to the execution time of the special view variation display game in the case of the small hit result in the first specific game state ST2, the game in the special game state is the first specific game It becomes like a game in the state ST2, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, if the display of the special pattern is displayed in a pseudo manner in the decorative special pattern variation display game display unit 85 similarly to FIG. 114 (a) in the interval time and the next round starts after stopping in the specific result mode, The game in the special game state becomes like the game in the first specific game state ST2, and the interest of the game can be improved. Specific result modes include, for example, result modes that can be derived only during a small hit result mode or a special game state. If the fanfare time and ending time in the special gaming state are short (for example, 100 ms), the start and end of the special gaming state become unclear and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, in the pseudo variation display performed by the decoration special view variation display game display unit 85 in the interval time, the decoration special drawing corresponding to the special view variation display game in order to clarify the pseudo change display. Identification information not used in the variable display game may be used. In addition, the background or the edge of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 may be changed to a different form to clearly notify that it is a pseudo variation display. As a method of setting it as a different mode, for example, making transparency different, making shade different, making a color different, making a size differ is mentioned. Further, as a result mode, a result mode indicating a round to be started may be displayed. For example, in the case of the interval time between the second round and the third round, the result mode "3" "R" "eye" may be displayed as the result mode, and the third round may be started.

  In addition, a plurality of second starting memories can be stored as starting memories for the special view 2 variable display game, and a decoration starting memory display for displaying information of the second starting memory may be performed on the display device 41. In this case, the decoration start storage display may be displayed even in the special game state, and it may be understood that the pseudo change display is a pseudo change display by not reducing the decoration start storage display. In addition, when the in-execution storage display unit 89 is provided to display information related to the starting storage corresponding to the currently executing special view variation display game as shown in FIG. 117 described later, the in-execution storage display unit 89 is special It may be displayed even in the game state, and a specific image such as "Hit" may be displayed here. It can also be shown that this is a pseudo fluctuation.

  Also, the special result mode is displayed as it is as the display of the decorative special view variation display game display unit 85 in the special game state generated in the first specific game state ST2, but it may be other display modes. You may or may not display it. As another display mode, only one identification information may be displayed, or information different from the identification information may be displayed as information indicating that it is a hit. By doing this, it can be made not to be aware of being in the special game state, the game in the special game state becomes like the game in the first specific game state ST2, and the interest of the game is improved can do.

  In addition, the special result mode in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game in the first specific gaming state ST2 is the same as the special result mode (the same number of the same numbers) in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state ST1 The special outcome mode may be different from the special outcome mode in the normal game state ST1. By doing this, it is possible to make the derivation of the special result not be conscious, and it is possible to make the special gaming state thereafter not to be conscious, and the game in the special gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST2. It becomes like a game of and can improve the interest of the game.

  As such a special result aspect, for example, the identification information is not added to the same number but to the right as "123", the identification information is +1 as it goes to the right, and as it goes to the right like "321" It is also possible that the information is -1. In addition, a part of the variable display areas such as “121”, “112” and “211” may be added to the identification information of the other variable display areas, or “212” and “221”. As in “122”, a part of the variable display areas may be minus 1 to the identification information of the other variable display areas. Further, for example, it may be set as a specific result aspect out of the result aspect of the out result in the normal gaming state ST1, such as "492". Further, some or all of the variable display areas such as “1A1” and “AAA” may be stopped at identification information (“A” in this case) which is not used in the normal gaming state ST1.

  Moreover, although the specific round was made into the 1st round, you may be rounds other than this. Also, conversion to the open state may be performed multiple times in one round. For example, it is possible to provide a period for temporarily closing each round, and to perform conversion to the open state twice. Of course, conversion to the open state may be performed three or more times. Even in this case, it is preferable to set the open state period substantially the same as the open time in the special game state based on the small hit. In addition, it is preferable to set the period to be once closed to the same time as the execution time of the special view fluctuation display game in the case of the small hit result in the first specific gaming state ST2. This makes it possible to give an impression as if the first specified gaming state ST2 has continued for a long time. Even when conversion to the open state is performed a plurality of times in one round, it is possible to report a time value obtained by totaling the openable time of each time.

  Also, instead of notifying the openable time in the special gaming state, the number of times of opening may be notified. For example, in the case of a 12R probability variation big hit, it is informed that there are 11 remaining openings in a specific round, and the remaining number is subtracted every execution of the round. When conversion to the open state is performed several times in one round, the number of conversions to the open state is indicated. For example, in the case where there is a period in which the closed state is once made in each round and conversion to the open state is performed twice, it is possible to notify that the remaining 22 times are open. If there is a round with a possibility that the round may end due to the openable time being long and the special variation winning device winning a game ball of the upper limit number, even if the openable time is notified, it does not reach the notified time. There is a possibility that the round may end, and there is a possibility that a contradiction may occur in the notification, but the occurrence of such a problem can be prevented if the number of opening is notified.

  In addition, although it is decided that the game ball wins the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round, the condition for notification of the openable time is not limited to this. For example, generation of a special gaming state, start of a specific round, or an elapse of a predetermined time from the start of a specific round may be used as the condition of notification.

  Moreover, when alerting | reporting the total value of openable time, it is not necessary to alert | report the value less than a second. Alternatively, a value less than a second may be a display that roughly matches the actual openable time. A value less than a second does not cause a problem even if it is not accurately displayed because it is a moment from the viewpoint of the player. In addition, it is easier to visualize the remaining time by displaying with good values of the division. For example, when the notification time table shown in FIG. 113 (b) defines 14.40 seconds, a value less than a second may be rounded or rounded off and displayed as 14 seconds. Further, the display may be made in units of 0.5 seconds, and in the case where the notification time table defines 14.40 seconds, 0.1 seconds may be added to display 14.5 seconds. As described above, in the notification time table shown in FIG. 113 (b), an openable time including a value less than a second may be defined, and a value less than a second may be corrected at the time of display. In this case, the value to be corrected may be defined in the notification time table, or may be calculated each time. Further, the value itself of the notification time table may be data obtained by correcting a value less than a second.

  Further, the time displayed by the acquisition time display 92 is an interval time or a time required for the opening operation or closing operation of the special fluctuation winning device, in addition to the opening possible time when the special fluctuation winning device is opened. The time required for updating the image of, the ending time, etc. may be included. For example, the time from the timing when the special fluctuation winning device is closed, which is the timing when the first round is finished, to the time when the ending is finished and the special figure fluctuation display game is started is displayed Also good.

  In addition, in the acquisition time display 92, a part of the possible opening time may be notified, and an effect may be provided to suggest or notify that the time value may be added to the acquisition time display 92. FIG. 116 shows an example of such an effect. In addition, the example of the special gaming state based on the 12R probability variation big hit is shown here.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), an acquisition time display 92 is displayed when the specific round is started. Thereafter, when the first gaming ball is won in the special variation winning device, 1.80 seconds are added to the acquisition time display as shown in FIG. 116 (b). In addition, a stock display 97 is displayed at the lower right of the display area. The stock display 97 indicates or informs that the time value is added to the acquisition time display 92. That is, it is possible that the opening time is stocked in the acquisition time display 92 and the additional opening time is stocked in the stock display 97. The stock display 97 is configured such that the value increases by one for each winning on the special variation winning device.

  In this example, the special gaming state is based on the 12R probability variation big hit, but the change of the acquisition time display 92 is the same as the 5R probability variation big hit. Then, when the ninth game ball, which is the upper limit number in a specific round, wins, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 9.04 seconds, and the value of the stock display is 9 It becomes. Here, since the special gaming state is based on the 12R probability variation big hit, the total of the 2R to 12R openable time is 19.89 seconds, and in the acquisition time display 92, only a part of the openable time is notified. There is.

  At the end of the first round, which is a specific round, and at an interval time, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the explanation display at the center of the display area becomes “during stock release”, indicating that the acquired time is released Be Thereafter, the value of the acquisition time display 92 decreases with the opening of the special variation winning device, and as shown in FIG. 116 (e), the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 0 seconds as the fifth round ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), an effect is produced in which the stock display 97 is released toward the acquisition time display 92 and works on the acquisition time display 92. At this time, effects are repeated by the value of the stock display 97, and the value of the stock display 97 decreases and the value of the acquisition time display 92 can be increased for each effect. As a result of this effect, as shown in FIG. 116 (f), the value of the acquisition time display 92 is increased and the sixth round is started. The same effect as in FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (e) is performed in the case of the 5R probability variation big hit, and the time value is not added to the acquisition time display 92 at the stage of FIG. 116 (f) and remains 0 seconds. It is possible to end the special gaming state.

  In the effect of FIG. 116 (e), a plurality of stock displays 97 may be simultaneously released to the acquisition time display 92. Further, the increase amount of the value of the acquisition time display 92 by the one stock display 97 may have an upper limit of 1.8 seconds for one round, or may be increased without an upper limit. In the specific round, the value of the stock display 97 may be always increased for each winning, or may not increase even if the winning is achieved. Further, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased one by one or may be increased by two or more. Further, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased regardless of the winning. Furthermore, it may be suggested that the larger the value of the stock display 97, the higher the possibility that the increase amount of the value of the acquisition time display 92 will be large in the effect of FIG. 116 (e).

  Also, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased other than the specific round. For example, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased in the period from (d) to (e) in FIG. Further, the value of the stock display 97 may be increased again in the rounds after FIG. 116 (f). In this case, a part of the possible open time scheduled in the stage of FIG. 116 (f) may be notified. Moreover, the increase of the acquisition time display 92 as shown in FIG. 116 (e) does not have to be due to the stock display 97, and the time value is added with or without some effect. Anything is fine.

  From the above, in the gaming machine which executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a control means for controlling the game (Game control apparatus 100) and the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 capable of converting the closed state where the game ball can not win a prize to the open state where the game ball can win a prize, and the control means is plural in the special game state The special fluctuation winning device can be converted to the open state according to the predetermined opening time for each round of the special fluctuation winning arrangement scheduled after the notification condition is satisfied in response to the establishment of the predetermined notification condition The open time according to the open state of the device can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to perform novel effects unlike before, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the notification of the open time according to the open state of the special variation winning prize device is not necessarily limited to the one that notifies an accurate value, and one that notifies the approximate time, or not the time but a plurality of open time lengths The notification may be made in (for example, three steps).

  Further, the notification condition is to be a specific round in the special game state, and the control means is in the open state of the special variation winning device in each round after the specific round in response to the establishment of the notification condition. The total time value of the corresponding open time will be notified. Therefore, it is possible to perform novel effects unlike before, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in response to the game ball winning a special variation winning device in a specific round in the special gaming state, it is possible to notify the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in the round after the specific round It will be. Therefore, it is possible to perform novel effects unlike before, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the control means ends the round even before the opening time according to the open state of the special fluctuation winning device elapses, when the predetermined number of gaming balls win the special fluctuation winning device in the round. The special fluctuation winning device is controlled to be closed, and in a special round in the special gaming state, every time the game ball wins the special fluctuation winning device, the total opening time in each round after the specific round Informing a part of the time value, when a predetermined number of gaming balls win the special variation winning device, all the total opening time value in each round after the specific round is notified It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to perform novel effects unlike before, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, the special result includes the first special result with the operation of the condition device and the second special result without the operation of the condition device, and the control means is advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result. The special variation winning device can be converted to the open state according to the predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the gaming state, and in the specific round in the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, the specific Special variation in the round after the specific round in the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result can be notified of the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in the round after the round of The opening time according to the opening state of the winning device is the same as the opening time according to the opening state of the special variation winning device in the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the second special result And thus it was. Therefore, it is possible to perform novel effects unlike before, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Although the openable time (open time) in the first special result (big hit) and the openable time (open time) in the second special result (small hit) are the same, they are completely the same. Also, there may be a difference to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the openable time based on the small hit is 1792 ms, and the openable time at the lower open of the big hit is 1808 ms, which is a different openable time, but the difference between them is 16 ms. Since it is difficult for the player to determine the difference in openable time, it can be said that the openable time is substantially the same. Although the difference between the openable times may be more than this, it is preferable that the difference be difficult for the player to distinguish between the two.

  In addition, the control means ends the round even before the opening time according to the open state of the special fluctuation winning device elapses, when the predetermined number of gaming balls win the special fluctuation winning device in the round. The special fluctuation winning device is controlled to be in the closed state, and in the specific round in the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, the special fluctuation winning device is specified each time the game ball wins. If a part of the total time value of the opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in each round after the round is notified, and a predetermined number of gaming balls win the special variation winning device, the specific All of the total opening time values according to the open state of the special variation winning device in each round after the round will be notified. Therefore, it is possible to perform novel effects unlike before, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the suggestion of the degree of expectation in reach production is explained. First, the display on the display device 41 in the normal gaming state ST1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), at the center of the display area of the display device 41, an ornament special game variation display game display unit 85 for displaying the first ornament game of the ornament special game variation display game is provided. Here, the decorative feature variation display game is displayed by variably displaying identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then displaying the identification information in a stopped state. At the upper left portion of the display area, a second decoration game display unit 95 for displaying a second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 95 is similar to the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special feature variation display game display unit 85, and each of the left, middle, and right areas is displayed. After the identification information is changed and displayed, the display is stopped and the result is displayed.

  Further, at the lower center of the display area, there is provided a storage display unit 88 for displaying a decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the start storage. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the memory display unit 88 corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the order of the memory, and in this case, there are three first start memories It shows. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is digested.

  Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to each start memory and the prefetching result such as the fluctuation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 117 (a), the pre-reading effect which changes the display mode of decoration special figure starting memory display is performed about the 1st starting memory | storage whose digesting order is the 1st.

  On the left side of the storage display unit 88, an in-execution storage display unit 89 is provided which displays information related to starting storage corresponding to the currently-executed special view variation display game. In the in-execution storage display portion 89, the display of the special figure start storage display at the left end of the storage display portion 88 is transferred at the start of the special view variation display game, and the result of the special view variation display game to be executed Is suggested by the display mode. In the upper right portion of the display area, a starting memory number display unit 96 for displaying the starting memory number is provided. The number of first start memories is displayed on the start memory number display unit 96.

  When the first starting memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 117 (a), the decorative special drawing start memory display at the left end of the memory display unit 88 is being executed as shown in FIG. 117 (b). An indication to flow into is made. Here, the result during the special view variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like are suggested in the same manner as the pre-reading effect also in the in-execution storage display unit 89. Further, in the starting memory number display unit 96, the numerical value decreases by one.

  Then, in the decoration special view fluctuation display game display unit 85, the decoration special view fluctuation display game corresponding to the special view 1 fluctuation display game based on the first start memory is started, and identification is performed in each of left, middle and right fluctuation display areas Variable display of information is started. Also, in the second decoration game display unit 95, the decoration special view fluctuation display game corresponding to the special view 1 fluctuation display game based on the first start storage is started, and identification information is displayed in each of the left area, middle area and right area. The variable display is started.

  After that, when it is in the reach state, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area of the decorative figure fluctuation display game display unit 85. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to shake, which indicates that the stop has not been completely stopped. In the second decoration game display unit 95, the same identification information temporarily stops in the left area and the right area.

  Then, in the case of developing to the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 117 (d), an effect by a character or the like is performed. In this case, the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85, the storage display unit 88, and the in-execution storage display unit 89 are erased, and reach effect is displayed at the center of the display area. The display of the second decoration game display unit 95 and the start memory number display unit 96 is continued, and the status of the special view variation display game and the start memory number can be confirmed.

  The reach state where the identification information of the middle variation display area is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 117 (c) and the special view variation display game is ended is N reach, and as shown in FIG. 117 (d) The reach state to be performed is SP reach. There are several types of effects other than the effects shown here for the SP reach effects. For each reach effect, the selection probability in the case of a special result is defined. That is, each reach effect has an expected degree of special result.

  In addition, it is possible to perform reach effect performed in N reach and SP reach as a basic effect, and to add and execute a common effect that can be commonly executed to the basic effect. FIG. 118 shows an example of the common effect.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a reach effect (basic effect) that becomes a big hit if the ally character escapes from the enemy character, and FIGS. 118 (b) to 118 (e) are common effect 94 is added to the reach effect making this basic effect. Example. Also, FIG. 118 (f) is a reach effect (basic effect) in which the ally character and the enemy character fight and the ally character wins, and is a big hit, and FIGS. 118 (g) to (j) are reach effects that make this basic effect. Is an example in which a common effect 94 is added. Further, as shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (f), in the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect 93 indicating the effect content by character information.

  The common effect 94 is to perform effects accompanied by character information of “expected degree UP” in common to the respective basic effects. The common effect 94 also has a plurality of types of effects, and the common effect 94 in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (g) is an effect that displays only character information, and the common effect 94 in FIGS. 118 (c) and 118 (h). Is an effect of displaying the character information surrounded by a solid line, and the common effect 94 of FIGS. 118 (d) and 118 (i) is an effect of displaying the character information by hatching.

  FIGS. 118 (e) and 118 (j) are effects in which a specific effect 93 indicating the effect content by character information and a common effect 94 are simultaneously executed. In the common effect 94 in this case, an effect of displaying only character information as shown in FIG. 118 (b), an effect of displaying character information as shown in FIG. 118 (c) surrounded by a solid line, FIG. 118 There is an effect of displaying character information as shown in (d) by hatching. In (b) to (e) and (g) to (j) in FIG. 118, the one accompanied by the character information of “expected degree UP” is shown as the common effect 94, but a plurality of types exist other than this. . Further, the specific effect 93 is not limited to the one indicating the contents of the effect by character information.

  The degree of expectation is also set for each common effect, and the degree of expectation for a special result is more clearly suggested by the degree of expectation of the basic effect and the degree of expectation of the common effect 94. The degree of expectation of the common effect 94 is made to differ depending on the type of the basic effect to be combined even in the same type of common effect 94.

  In the example of FIG. 118, the degree of expectation of the basic effect shown in FIG. 118 (a) is 50%, and the degree of expectation of the basic effect shown in FIG. 118 (f) is 60%. The degree of expectation of the common effect 94 for displaying only character information is 10% in the case of FIG. 118 (b) and is 20% in the case of FIG. 118 (g). Further, the expectation of the common effect 94 in which the character information is displayed surrounded by a solid line is 40% in the case of FIG. 118 (c) and 10% in the case of FIG. 118 (h). Further, the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 for displaying character information by hatching is 30% in the case of FIG. 118 (d) and 30% in the case of FIG. 118 (i).

  Further, the expectation of the common effect 94 in which the character information performed together with the specific effect 93 is displayed surrounded by a solid line is 50% in the case of FIG. 118 (c) and 20% in the case of FIG. 118 (h). ing. The degree of expectation of the common effect 94 when the specific effect 93 is simultaneously executed is a value obtained by adding 10% to the degree of expectation when the common effect 94 of the same type is not simultaneously executed with the specific effect 93.

  That is, the common effect 94 is composed of a plurality of elements (text information, an enclosure, etc.), and there are a plurality of types of common effects 94 in which at least one element is common and the other elements are different. It is possible to make each degree of expectation of Furthermore, it is possible to make each of the plurality of types of common effects 94 different in the degree of expectation depending on the type of the basic effect and the specific effect 93 to be combined. Further, even if each element is the same common effect 94, it is possible to make the degree of expectation different depending on the basic effect to be combined.

  Thus, the expectation of the common effect 94 differs depending on the type of the basic effect combined even with the same type of common effect 94. Then, the order of the expectation of the plurality of common effects 94 when combined with a certain basic effect and the order of the expectation of the plurality of common effects 94 when combined with other basic effects do not necessarily coincide It has been made to be. In this way, simply by adding the common effect, it is not shown that the expectation is high, but since the expectation of the common effect 94 is determined by the combination of the basic effect and the common effect 94, As opposed to this, a plurality of degrees of expectation are associated with each other, so that the interest for the whole effect can be enhanced, and the interest for gaming can be improved.

  Further, the degree of expectation shown in the basic effect and the degree of expectation shown in the common effect 94 are independent of each other, and it is easy to grasp the accurate degree of expectation by showing the degree of expectation by a plurality of indices. For example, it is estimated that the degree of expectation is high if the effect with a high degree of expectation is performed in both the basic effect and the common effect 94. In addition, although one of the basic effect and the common effect 94 is performing an effect with a high degree of expectation, the other is a effect with a low degree of expectation, it is estimated that the degree of expectation may be low.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned expectation, the difference of the expectation of the said common production 94 in, when performing the same common production 94 with respect to each basic production is a different value (10% in FIG. 118 (b) and (g) The difference is a difference of 30% in FIGS. 118 (c) and (h) and a difference of 0% in FIGS. 118 (d) and (i). The same value may be used. For example, there is a difference of 10% between 50% which is the expectation of the basic effect shown in FIG. 118 (a) and 60% which is the expectation of the basic effect shown in FIG. 118 (f). On the other hand, when the same common effect 94 is performed, the difference between the expectations of the common effect 94 may be 10%.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) to 118 (d) and (g) to (i), it is possible to prevent the common effect 94 from being performed during the period in which the specific effect 93 is being executed. The area where the common effect 94 is displayed can partially or entirely overlap the area where the specific effect 93 is displayed.

  As described above, by preventing the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 from being performed simultaneously, it is possible to prevent a large number of effects from being performed simultaneously and the effect contents becoming complicated, and in particular, the effects accompanied by character information are not simultaneously performed. By doing so, the player can easily understand. Furthermore, the area where the common effect 94 is displayed is partially or entirely overlapped with the area where the specific effect 93 is displayed, so that the position where the player confirms the information is prevented from largely changing, and the information In order to be easy to acquire.

  Also, on the principle that the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not simultaneously performed, as an exception, if it is possible to simultaneously execute the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 as shown in FIGS. 118 (e) and (j). It becomes clear that the common rendition 94 of the case indicates that the possibility of a big hit is higher. Conversely, in the case where the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not simultaneously performed, the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not simultaneously performed, except that the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not simultaneously performed. However, the degree of expectation may be high.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, the common effect 94 is allocated to a layer different from the basic effect or the specific effect 93, and the layer of the common effect 94 is disposed on the forefront. By doing this, the common effect 94 can be reliably viewed. Also, the layer of the common effect 94 may be translucent so that the image of the layer behind can be seen. In this way, even if the common effect 94 is displayed for a plurality of different basic effects, the image of the basic effect in the rear is always transparent, so the basic effect is always visible and common when creating the basic effects It is not necessary to consider the display position of the effect 94, and the degree of freedom in creating the basic effect is not impaired.

  Such basic effects and common effects are selected on the basis of the result of the special view fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern selected by the game control apparatus 100 in the fluctuation effect setting process shown in FIG. In the case where the execution mode is as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) to 118 (d) and (g) to (i), the specific mode 93 and the common effect 94 are not simultaneously executed. In the case of (j) and (j), the execution timing of both is set so that the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are simultaneously executed.

  The specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are not limited to those accompanied by character information, but may be character display or the like. Further, the execution mode of each common effect 94 is not limited to the above-described one, as long as the common effect 94 can be distinguished, for example, by making the size and the color of characters different. Although the specific effect 93 and the common effect 94 are displayed in substantially the same size, one may be displayed larger than the other. Also, two or more common effects 94 may be executable. In this case, a plurality of common effects 94 may not be simultaneously executed, or a plurality of common effects 94 may be simultaneously executed.

  Further, the expectation for the entire effect may be determined by the combination with the basic effect or the specific effect 93 without setting the expectation for the common effect 94 itself. For example, in FIG. 118 (b) to (e), it is shown that the expectation is higher in the order of (b), (c), (d) and (e), and in FIG. 118 (g) to (j) , (J), (i), (h), and (g) may indicate that the degree of expectation is high. Furthermore, as a target of the combination for determining the degree of expectation, the type of identification information that is reach, other notice effects performed in advance, pre-reading effects, etc. may be included. That is, the common effect 94 may indicate the degree of expectation by a combination with other effects different from the common effect 94.

  Further, the degree of expectation of the common effect 94 may be added to the degree of expectation of the basic effect. For example, in the common effect 94 with the character information of “expected degree UP” shown in FIG. 118, the expectation is + 5% by the effect of displaying only the character information, and the expectation is + 10%, the network by the effect of displaying by surrounding the solid line. The expected degree may be increased by + 15% by the effect displayed by multiplication. Furthermore, the additional value of each common effect 94 may be further added by 5% by being executed simultaneously with the specific effect 93. In this case, assuming that the degree of expectation of the basic effect in FIG. 118 (a) is 50%, the degree of expectation in FIG. 118 (b) is 55%, the degree of expectation in FIG. 118 (c) is 60%, and FIG. 118 (d) The degree of expectation of F. is 65%, and the degree of expectation of FIG. 118 (e) is 65% obtained by adding 5% to the expectation of FIG. 118 (c), which is 60%. Further, two or more common effects 94 may be executable, and the degree of expectation is added by the amount of the common effects 94 performed.

  From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and in the gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, effect control for controlling the effect of the game A means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means is executable together with a plurality of types of basic effects and a plurality of types of basic effects set so that the degree of expectation that the game result is a special result is different. Yes, it is possible to execute common effects that can be executed commonly for each of a plurality of types of basic effects, and common effects can be displayed in the same effect mode in each of a plurality of types of basic effects, Thus, the degree of expectation in the common effect is different according to the type of the basic effect to be displayed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means can be executed together with a plurality of types of basic effects and a plurality of types of basic effects, and can execute a common effect 94 commonly executable for each of the plurality of types of basic effects. That is, in the period in which the specific effect 93 is executed in the basic effect, the common effect is not performed. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the contents of the effect, and it is possible to execute an effective effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the display control device 41 includes a display device 41 controlled by the effect control means and capable of displaying the effect of the game, and the effect control means executes the effect of displaying the character information on the display device 41 as the specific effect 93 executed in the basic effect. The effect of displaying character information as the common effect 94 on the display device 41 is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the character information from being displayed redundantly, it becomes easy to grasp the contents of the effect, it is possible to execute an effective effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means executes the effect so that the area in which the specific effect 93 is displayed on the display device 41 and the area in which the common effect 94 is performed overlap. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the contents of the effect, and it is possible to execute an effective effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed simultaneously, but while one special figure variation display game is being executed, the other special figure variation display game is executed. It is also possible to wait for the execution of. In this case, one of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game may be preferentially executed, and the special view change display game may be sequentially played in the order of generation of start storage. Also, only one type of special view variable display game may be executed instead of two types.

  In addition, although the high probability state is obtained by passing the gaming ball to the probability change operation area 38h, it may be determined whether to be the high probability state based on the big hit symbol. In this way, it is not necessary to provide a long open round for enabling passage of the game ball to the definite variation operation area 38h, and all rounds can be made equal to the open time equivalent to the small hit.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the termination condition of the specific gaming state.

  FIG. 119 shows a state transition diagram in this modification. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the ending conditions of the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3 are to be won in the falling lottery. The fall lottery is to be performed at the start of the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game in the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3, and by winning this lottery The special game variation display game is changed to the normal game state ST1.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the high probability variation number updating process (steps Y257 and Y268) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 46 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Further, the falling lottery process shown in FIG. 120 is performed at the beginning of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 46 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process shown in FIG.

[Fall lottery processing]
FIG. 120 shows a falling lottery process performed at the start of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game. Note that the same processing as the high probability change frequency update processing shown in FIG. 61 is assigned the same reference numeral. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether the high probability is in progress (step Y581), and if it is not in the high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process is ended. If the high probability is being obtained (step Y581; Y), the falling lottery random number is acquired (step Y591), and it is determined whether the falling lottery is won by referring to the determination value (step Y592).

  If the player has not won the falling lottery (step Y592; N), the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. If the player has won the falling lottery (step Y592; Y), the high probability state after step Y584 is terminated.

  In this way, when it is decided to win the end condition of the specific gaming state in the fall lottery, by performing the effect during the special gaming state as shown in FIG. 114, FIG. It can appear that the remaining period is guaranteed to continue without ending the first specified gaming state ST2. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that there is a period in which falls do not fall in a gaming machine with a fall lottery, and it is possible to create a novel game which has not been provided conventionally.

  From the above, the probability setting means (game control device) is capable of setting the high probability state in which the control means (game control device 100) can increase the probability more than the normal probability state as the probability state that the game result is a special result. 100) and falling lottery means (game control apparatus 100) for performing a falling lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the normal probability state every time the game is executed, when the high probability state is established; The special fluctuation winning device can be converted to the open state over a predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the special gaming state, and the opening scheduled after the notification condition is established based on the establishment of the predetermined notification condition The time can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify the period in which the normal probability state is not shifted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The first start winning opening 36 may be provided with a normal fluctuation winning device. This normally fluctuating winning device includes a pair of movable members that can be opened in the shape of a reverse "ha" and converted into a state in which gaming balls are likely to flow in, and the pair of movable members are constantly spaced about the diameter of the gaming balls. It holds a closed closed state (state disadvantageous to the player), and it is possible to win a prize in the first start winning opening 36 through an interval of the diameter of the gaming ball. Then, when the result of the common view change display game different from the special view change display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the common electric solenoid as a drive device opens in a reverse "ha" shape The game player is made to change to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning device. That is, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus can be converted into the closed state and the open state in which the game ball can be more easily winning than the closed state. The control of the normal fluctuation winning device and the control of the normal fluctuation display game are performed by the game control device 100.

  There are two states of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus and the execution mode of the common drawing fluctuation display game, a state with general power support and a state without general power support. The general-power-supporting state is a state in which the number of winnings to the first start winning opening 36 per unit time is controlled to be larger than that in the non-general-power support state. Control such that the number of winnings to the first start winning opening 36 per unit time is increased indicates a common drawing fluctuation time which is a fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game and a result aspect of the common drawing fluctuation display game It may be mentioned to shorten the regular drawing stop time which is the time, and to increase the probability that the common drawing fluctuation display game will hit. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of times of opening when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a hit and open the normal fluctuation winning device or to lengthen the opening time.

  FIG. 121 shows the transition of the gaming state when the first start winning opening 36 is provided with the normal variation winning device. The transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 119 is basically the same, but in the normal gaming state ST1, the first specified gaming state ST2 and the second specified gaming state ST3, no power transmission support is made. In addition, special results are derived in the special view 1 variation display game in the normal gaming state ST1 and the second specific gaming state ST3 to be a special gaming state, in the special variation operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the special gaming state When the game ball flows in and is detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d (V pass is made), it shifts to the third specified game state ST4.

  The third specified gaming state ST4 is a high probability state of hitting probability, and is a time-shortened state in which the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game is shorter than that of the normal gaming state ST1 (with time reduction). The variation time of the special view 2 variation display game is not shortened. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the support mode. Further, since the main variation special view is a special view 1 variation display game, the main start area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first start winning opening 36. That is, it is designed such that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. It should be noted that the arrangement of the first start winning opening 36 may be set to a position where it can be aimed even by hitting the right, and may be hit in the third specified gaming state ST4.

  Since this third specific gaming state ST4 has a high probability of becoming a special result than the normal gaming state ST1 and the first start memory is likely to occur, the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game is also shortened, so it is special in a short time. It is highly likely that an outcome will occur, which is an advantage for the player. In addition, since it is easy to win the first start winning opening 36, many prize balls are paid out, which is also advantageous to the player. However, it is not the extent that the number of balls increases, and the number of balls gradually decreases, although not as much as the normal gaming state ST1.

  In this third specific gaming state ST4, when a special drawing variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times without winning in the falling lottery, the processing shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2. Along with this transition, the normal power transmission support no state is established, and the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal gaming state ST1. The variation time of the special view 1 variation display game may or may not be shortened.

  The predetermined number of times for transitioning to the first specified gaming state ST2 may be selected based on the type of the special result triggered to transition to the third specified gaming state ST4, or the type of special result may be selected. It may be a fixed number of times regardless. For example, if the even result is the corresponding special result as the result form of the decoration special figure variation display game, 50 odd times or the odd even number other than 7 as the result aspect of the decoration special figure variation display game In the case of the special result to be performed, it may be made 30 times, and in the case of the special result of the decorative special feature variation display game being the special result corresponding to 7 of the cases it is made 10 times.

  In addition, when it is the special result where the particular design corresponds as a result feature of the decoration special figure fluctuation indicatory game, it tries to shift to 1st specified game state ST2 without passing 3rd specified game state ST4 as 0 times It is good. In addition, when it is the special result where the particular design corresponds as a result feature of the decoration special figure fluctuation indicatory game, it is possible not to shift to 1st specified game state ST2. In addition, the predetermined number of times may be determined by lottery at the end of the special game state or the like regardless of the special result.

  It is advantageous for the player to continue the high probability state without winning the fall lottery. In addition, even in the high probability state, as described above, since the number of held balls tends to gradually decrease in the third specified gaming state ST4, one that transitions to the first specified gaming state ST2 where an increase in the number of held balls can be expected Is advantageous for the player, and it is more advantageous for the player to transition earlier. That is, the game is shifted to a more advantageous state for the player by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times, and the advantageous degree after the end of the special gaming state is different by the difference in the predetermined number of times. It is done.

  In the conventional gaming machine, after the end of the special gaming state is only a state equivalent to the third specific gaming state ST4, in the state that the next special result does not occur for a long time despite the high probability state Once in a so-called fit state, the number of balls holding only continues to decrease, and since the monotonous game continues, the interest of the game is reduced. However, as described above, after performing the third specific gaming state ST4 for a fixed period, the number of balls increases if the first specific gaming state ST2 is reached by transitioning to the first specific gaming state ST2. In this case, the interest for the player can be improved even if the player is in the inserted state, since the player is more advantageous to the player as it is fitted in the opposite direction to the conventional one.

  Further, by transitioning to the first specific gaming state ST2, it is possible to give the player a benefit for maintaining the high probability state for a long time without falling, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, the transition to the first specific game state ST2 provides relief for the inset state, and can give an incentive to continue the game. And, in the first specific game state ST2, it is possible to have a non-conventional game characteristic of expecting that a special result is not derived in order to increase the number of held balls.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game equivalent to the third specific gaming state ST4 continues for a long period of time, the gaming balls on the upper tray 21 decrease or disappear, and the reduction in the number of balls is clear visually And the interest of the game is reduced. Furthermore, when the gaming balls in the upper tray 21 decrease or disappear, the gaming balls acquired in the special gaming state are first discharged to the upper tray 21 even if the special result is derived, so the payout to the lower tray 23 is made. There was a small impression that the game ball acquired in the special game state had few. However, as described above, by making it possible to shift to the first specific game state ST2, it is possible to return the number of balls of the upper tray 21 to the same state as at the end of the special game state, giving visual satisfaction. It is possible to pay out to the lower tray 23 from the start of the special game state, and to give an impression that the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is large.

  In addition, by passing through the third specific gaming state ST4, when the special result is derived in this period, the bonus in the first specific gaming state ST2 will not be granted, so the player There is no advantage, and the balance of profits between the player and the game arcade can be made appropriate.

  In addition, after showing that there are three values of 10, 30, and 50 as values that can be selected as the predetermined number of times, it is difficult to grasp the predetermined number of times of transition to the first specified gaming state ST2 from the result of the decorative special view variation display game In the third specific gaming state ST4, the number of executed games may be notified. By doing this, it is possible to give an interest as to whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state ST2 when the number of executed games reaches 10 or 30, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since it is indicated that the number of executed games reaches 50 and the transition to the first specific gaming state ST2 is made, it is possible to play the game with ease. Of course, the number of remaining games until reaching a predetermined number of times in the third specific gaming state ST4 may be notified to indicate transition to the first specific gaming state ST2 in an easy-to-understand manner.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of the present modification is capable of generating the second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as in the special view 2 variable display game also for the special view 2 variable display game. And about the said 2nd starting memory, prior judgment of a result etc. is performed before the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the said 2nd starting memory, and the prefetch effect which performs suggestion or information based on the said prior determination result To be able to do.

  FIG. 122 shows an example of pre-reading effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), while the special view 2 variation display game is being executed in the first specific game state ST2, a second start memory which is a 12R probability variation big hit occurs, and along with this, read ahead The production has been started. When the pre-reading effect is started as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the game state display 81 displays “time stock mode”. In addition, the display color of the operation promotion display 87 changes to urge the operation of the effect button 25, and the explanation display of "press button to stock!" Is made.

  When the player operates the effect button 25, as shown in FIGS. 122 (c) and 122 (d), the value of the acquisition time display 92 increases. Here, since there is a second starting memory which is a 12R probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 122 (e), the value of the acquisition time display 92 becomes 19.89 seconds and the stock is completed, as shown in FIG. 122 (f) It is waiting for stock release. Thereafter, a special result is derived as shown in FIG. 122 (g), and a first round, which is a specific round, is started as shown in FIG. 122 (h). During this specific round, stock release is on standby, and with the start of the second round, the same effects as shown in FIG. 115 are performed.

  In this way, by making it possible to notify the available time as the pre-reading effect, it is possible to simultaneously give an indication that the special result is derived, an indication of the type of the special result, and an indication of the available time. It is possible to make a presentation. Note that such pre-reading effect is not limited to the execution of the special view variation display game, and can be performed even during the special game state. When performing during the special game state, it is possible to open the special game state based on the small hit or the big hit to be executed later on the time value notified in the acquisition time display 92 as the openable time in the special game state The time may be notified by adding time.

  In order to perform such pre-reading effect, in the special view start opening 2 switch process shown in FIG. 40, the special view 2 reserve number is the upper limit number (for example, 4) similar to the special view start opening 1 switch process shown in FIG. Remember to). In addition, as for special figure reservation information decision processing which is shown in Figure 39 while making decision even in 1st specific game state ST2 and big hit, decision of the result is executed regarding the special figure 2 starting memory, it prereads in production control device 300 Make it send information.

  From the above, starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories as the right to execute the game based on the detection of gaming balls in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37) (Game control apparatus 100), and predetermination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining start storage before a game corresponding to start storage stored in start storage means is executed, and control means (The game control apparatus 100), when it is determined by the prior determination means that there is a starting memory to be a special result, according to the open state of the special fluctuation winning device in the special gaming state to be executed corresponding to the special result The open time can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to perform novel effects unlike before, and to improve the interest of the game.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of the present variation differs in the operation mode of the first special change winning device 38.

  FIG. 123 shows the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in this modification. The lower long opening shown in FIG. 123 (a) is the same as FIG. 7 (a). The upper V open shown in FIG. 123 (b) is different from FIG. 7 (b) in that the first special variable winning prize device 38 is continuously opened without being closed in the middle of the round. The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the positive change operation area switch 38d are the same as in FIG. 7 (b). The upper short circuit opening shown in FIG. 123 (c) is different from FIG. 7 (c) in that the opening mode of the first special variation winning combination device 38 is the same as the upper V opening shown in FIG. 123 (b). The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the positive change operation area switch 38d are the same as in FIG. 7 (c).

  That is, the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 is the same for both the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, and can be set regardless of the type of special result. On the other hand, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability change operation area switch 38d are determined based on whether it is a probability change big hit or a normal big hit, and is determined based on the type of special result . With regard to the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability variation operation area switch 38d, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 123 (b) is set in the case of probability variation big hit, and in the case of normal big hit The second operation mode shown in FIG. 123 (c), in which the inflow to the positive change operation area 38h is difficult, is set.

  In the operation mode shown in FIG. 7, since the opening period of the first special variation winning device 38 is short in the upper short opening and only a small number of gaming balls can be won, in the definite variation big hit and the normal big hit of the same number of rounds, the upper short opening round The number of prize balls that can usually be obtained by the big hit is reduced by the amount of. However, by doing as shown in FIG. 123, compared to the case shown in FIG. 7, it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as in the other rounds even in the upper short opening, and the prize which can be obtained by the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit The number of balls can be the same.

  In addition, the opening mode of the first special variation winning apparatus 38 in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 123 (b) and the opening mode of the first special variation winning apparatus 38 in the upper short opening shown in FIG. 123 (c) are all Although the same open mode is used as the continuous open mode, as in the open mode in the upper V open mode shown in FIG. 7 (b) for the cases of FIGS. 123 (b) and (c), the closure may be interposed halfway. Further, in the cases of FIGS. 123 (b) and 123 (c), the opening mode of the first special variation winning device 38 is the same, but may be different. In the case of FIG. 123 (c), the predetermined number may be any opening mode in which the game balls can win a prize, and the predetermined number may be smaller than the specified number which is the end condition of the round. Also, the upper short circuit opening shown in FIG. 7C may be selectable, and the open mode may be selected according to the type of the special result.

  Further, with regard to the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability variation operation area switch 38d, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the probability variation big hit and the second operation shown in FIG. In the operation mode, the operation mode of the first lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the positive change operation area switch 38d are the same (t31 to t33 and t51 to t53), but may be different. In the case of the normal big hit, it is only necessary to set an operation mode that is more difficult to enter into the positive variation operation area 38h than the operation mode set in the case of the positive variation big hit, and the operation mode and the like can be set arbitrarily.

  Further, in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 123 (b), the standby period (t32 to t36) of the operation start (t36) of the lever solenoid 38f for the second time from the end (t32) of the operation for the first lever solenoid 38f is constant. Although it is time, this time can be set arbitrarily. However, it is preferable to set a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds to 10 seconds) shorter than a specified time (for example, 30 seconds from opening) which is a condition for closing the first special variation winning device 38.

  Also, this waiting period may be set according to conditions other than time. For example, after the first operation end (t32) of the lever solenoid 38f, the standby period is ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of gaming balls have won the first special variation winning device 38, and the second operation of the lever solenoid 38f You may start the The predetermined number in this case is a value smaller than a specified number (for example, 10) under which the first special variation winning device 38 is closed, and is preferably half or less (for example, 5). If this predetermined number is set to a value close to the specified number (for example, 8 or 9), the possibility of flowing into the positive variation operation area 38h becomes extremely low, and it is impossible to shift to the high probability state despite being a positive variation jackpot Sex is increased. Of course, the predetermined number may be set to a value close to the specified number (for example, eight or nine), and in this case, it is possible to play the game whether or not the last few winning balls can shift to the high probability state. Note that both the time and the number of winnings may be set as the end condition of the standby period, and the standby period may be ended based on achieving either one.

  From the above, the special fluctuation winning device is provided with an inflow restricting member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into a state where the gaming ball can not flow into the specific area and a state where the gaming ball can flow. The operation mode control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the opening / closing mode of the device and the operation mode of the inflow regulating member is provided, and the operation mode control means is a specific round among a plurality of rounds for opening the special variation winning device. Enables the game ball to flow into a specific area in the game, and the operation mode of the inflow restricting member in the specific round is more specific to the first operation mode and the first operation mode, depending on the type of the special result. In the second operation mode in which it is difficult to flow in, the control mode of the special variation winning device in the specific round is the same regardless of the type of special result. And thus in the 閉態 like can be controlled.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 first starting winning opening (starting winning area)
37 2nd start winning opening (starting winning area)
38 1st Special Variation Winning Device (Special Variation Winning Device)
39 2nd Special Variation Winning Device (Special Variation Winning Device)
100 game control device (control means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a gaming state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result,
Control means for controlling the game;
And a special variation winning device capable of converting the closed state where the game ball can not be won to the open state where the game ball can be reached.
The special results include a first special result with the operation of the condition device and a second special result without the operation of the condition device,
The control means
The special fluctuation winning device can be converted to the open state according to a predetermined opening time for each of a plurality of rounds in the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result.
In a specific round in a gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, an open time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in a round after the specific round can be notified,
The opening time according to the open state of the special variation winning device in the round after the specific round in the game state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result is the game corresponding to the second special result A game machine characterized in that the opening time is the same as the opening time according to the opening state of the special variation winning device in the gaming state which is advantageous to the player. The control means
If a predetermined number of gaming balls win the special fluctuation winning device in the round, the round is ended even before the opening time according to the opening state of the special fluctuation winning device elapses Control the variable winning device to be in the closed state;
In the specific round in the gaming state advantageous to the player corresponding to the first special result, the special variation winning device in each round after the specific round every time the gaming ball wins the special variation winning device Informing a part of the total time value of the opening time according to the open state of the, when a predetermined number of gaming balls win the special variation winning device, the special variation in each round after the specific round The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein all of the total time value of the open time according to the open state of the winning device is notified.

Images